YOUR BOOKS FOR ALL TIME

by Max B. Fajardo, Jr.

* SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

* SIMPLIFIED METHODS ON BUILDING
CONSTRUCTION
* PLUl'v'lBING DESIGN AND ESTIMATE
* ELECTRICAL LAYOUT AND ESTIMATE
* PLANNING AND DESIGNER'S HANDBOOK
i
I
I

l
II
'if

··".:Max B. Fajardo Jr.

i
i
.,J,I

IMPLIFI-ED CONSTRUCTION
........ · ... --····t---- .
tstima~-e SECOND EDITION .
··r
I,.

Published and Distributed by:

5138 MERCHANDIZING
"~.·.t:,
-~-l.-i~--
' ' .it .
48B Road3 -~If: ,r·-.
, ,. ~:
Project 6, Quezon City
Tel. No. 985767

ISSN · 971 · 8589 · 00 · 7

International Standard Book Number
t
 I '

PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION

Philippine Copyright
The Second edition of "Simplified Construction Estimate"
1988
. was prepared owing to the development and introduction of
new construction materials together with the adoption of the
by SI measure otherwise known as the System International for
the purpose of enriching the contents of the first edition.
Max B. Fajardo, Jr.
The cement is one example wherein p~.eviously it weighed
! ,·, 1
94 pounds per bag and was changed to 40 kilos which simply·
V: __;, ..i....)
mean a reduction in weight by 2.7 kilograms per bag. This
paved the way to the release of 50 kg. per bag cement in the
commercial market.

Under su'ch pressing conditions, the author felt the necessi-

ty to upgrade the book by revising its formula and further sim-
plify the Tables for easy reference. Likewise, proper p,ainting
ISBN - 971-8589-00-7 and wall . papering plus other newly introduced construc-
/ tion materials were incorpo,rated in this second edition for the
benefit of practicing Architects, Engineers and students alike.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Again with this line of endeavor, the author wishes to reite-
rate that "he does not claim that this book is in itself perfect."
In fact he would welcome suggestions from those who are
.
.
..
! -
~··~···.
.

.~~.-------~ : < - - ,._,

., better knowledgeable that may bring this book out to perfec-
tion.
_.,_ '
For the second edition, the author wishes to express grate·
fu I acknowledgement and indebtedness to those persons who
Every copy of this book must
in one way or another have contributed materially and morally
bear the genuin~ signature of the
in the timely realization of this book.
author. Copies not having the sig,
nature will be deemed to have
emanated from an illegal source.
MBF
 PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION TABLE OF CONTENTS

Estimate has always been regarded as a valuation based on

opinion or roughly made from imperfect or incomplete data; a CHAPTERl CONCRETE Pa~
calculation not professedly exact; an appraisement; also a state-
ment, as by a builder, in regard to the cost of certain work. 1-1 Plain Concrete l
1-2 The Principles of Concrete Mixing 3
This book is intended for the last definition. As the science 1-3 Unit of Measure 4
of. technology advances and the demand for technologists in- 1-4 Concrete Proportion 8
creases educators, architects, engineers, contractors, carpenters, 1-5 Concrete Slab 10
and other workers in allied fields are becoming more cognizant 1-6 Estimating by the Area Method 13
of the importance and value of near accuracy even in estimates. 1-7 Concrete Column 14
It is at this juncture that the author, in his desire to be of some 1-8 Estimating by the Linear
help, prepared this edition as an introductory text to facilitate Meter Method 16
the studies of beginning students and other interested persons 1-9 Post and Footing 19
who wish an instant answer to their problems involving cost of 1-10 Rectangular Column 23
construction materials. This book is, by design, an outline 1-11 Rectangular Beam and Girder 24
whose purpose is to guide those persons concerned on matters 1-12 Circular Column 25
of estimation. Tables and formula have been prepared with the 1-13·Conc~ete PiRes 28
hope that readers or users of the book will find it easy to for-
mulate solutions to their cost problems. Illustrative examples CHAPTER 2 MASONRY
were included to serve as visual aids for more perplexing prob- 2-1 Concrete Hollow B!ocks 31
lems. 2-2 Comparative Cost Analysis Between,
a Reinforced Concrete Wall and a
Since this is an initial attempt on the part of the author Concrete Hollow Block Wall 46
along this line of endeavor, he does not claim that this work is 2-3 Special Type of Concrete Hollow
in itself perfect. In fact he would welcome suggestions, from Blocks 53
those who are better knowledgeable that may further enrich the 2-4 Adobe Stone 55
contents of this book . ' 2-5 Decorative Concrete Blocks 60

For the present edition, the author wishes to express grate- CHAPTER 3 METAL REINFORCEMENT
ful acknowledgement for the valuable suggestions of Dean Fran-
cisa Guevara of UNEP, lriga City and Edgar Tuy who read the 3sl Steel Reinforcement 63
preliminary of the entire manuscript. The author likewise, 3-2 Identification of Steel Bars 65
.wishes to express his indebtedness to the countless persons here 3-3 Bar Splice, Hook and Bend 65
unnamed, who have contributed to the scientific and experien- 3-4 Concrete Hollow ·slacks
tial background from which this book has been based. Reinforcement 70
3-5 Tie Wire for Steel Reinforcement 74
3-6 Independent Footing Reinforcement 75
-M.B.F 3-7 Post and Column Reinforcement 81
 3-8 Beams and Girders Reintorcement CHAPTER 6 ROOFING MATERIALS
82
3-9 Lateral Ties 83
i 6-1 Galvanized Iron Sheet 171
3-10 Stirrups for Beams and Girders 94 I
3-11 Spiral and Column Ties 6-2 Asbestos Roofing 192
96
6-3 Colorbond Klip-Lok 198
3-12 One Way Reinforced Concrete Slab 99
6-4 Banawe Horizontal Metal Tile 199
3-13Two Way Reinforced Concrete Slab 102
3-14 Concrete Pipe Reinforcement 6-5 Marcelo Roofing System 200
105
6-6 Colorbond Custom ORB 201
6-7 Milano Longspan Stell Bricks 202 -1
CHAPTER 4 LUMBER l 6-8 Colorbond Trimdek Hi-Ten 202 I
I
4-1 Wood 107 I
4-2 Definition of Terms I CHAPTER 7 TILEWORK
107
4-3 Classification of Wood 108
4-4 Methods of Sawing the Log 110 7-1 Ceramic Tiles 205
4-5. Defects in Wood 112 7-2 Terrazo and Granolithic 211
4-6 - Seasoning of Lumber 112 7-3 Cement Tiles 214
I
4-7 Unit of Measure of Lumber 114 I · 7-4 Vinyl and Rubber Tiles 217
4-8 Wood Post 117
4-9 Girder 119 I CHAPTER 8 HARDWARE
I
4-10 Floor Joist and T & G Flooring 122
4-11 Siding Wood Board 126 8-1 Bolts 219
4-12 Girts, Rafters, Truss, Purlins and
8-2 Screw 226
Fascia Board 129
4-13 Studs 8-3 Nails 229
130
4-14 Cei1ing Joist 134
4-15 Ceiling Board 136-- · CHAPTER 9 STAIRCASE
4-16 Door Frame 140
4-17 Window Frame 9-1 Definition of Terms 237
143 I 9-2 Laying Out of Stairs 242
CHAPTER 5 FORMS, SCAFFOLDING I 9-3 Stringers 248
AND STAGING -
5-1
I CHAPTER 10 PAINTING \

Form 145
5-2 Greasing of Forms 147 10-1 Paint 253
5~3 Scaffolding and Staging 147 I I 10-2 Paint Failure 256
5-4 Comparative Analysis Between the 10-3 Surf ace Preparation 257
T & G and Plywood as Forms 149 10-4 Kinds of Paints, Uses and
5-5 Forms Using Plywood l56 Area Coverage 260
5-6, Forms of Circular Column 158 10-5 Estimating Your Paint 266
5-7 Estimating the Scaffolding and 10-6 Paint Failure and Remedy 272
Staging 165 10-7 Wallpapering 274

I
.I
1
CHAPTER 11 AUXILIARY TOPICS

11-1 Accordion Door Cover 277

chapter 1
11-2 Piles 279
11-3 Bituminous Surfc1ce Treatment 281
11-4 House of Water Tank 283
11-5 Filling Materials 285
11-6 Glass Jalousie 287
11-7 Nipa Shingle Roofing 288
11-8 Anahaw Roofing 290
11-9 Construction Terms 294
CONCRETE
1-1 PLAIN CONCRETE

By definition, concrete is an artificial stone as a result of

mixing cement, fine aggregates, coarse aggregates anJ water. The.
I
conglomeration of these materials producing a solid mass is
called plain concrete. Reinforced concrete is a concrete with re-
infortement embedded in such a manner that the two materials
act together in resisting forces.

The different types of cement used in the construction are:

1. Ordinary portland cement.

2. The Rapid Hardening portland cement is specified

. when high early strength is required.
3. Portland Blast Furnace or Sulphate is ~sed to resist
chemical attack.

4. Low Heat Portland cement is preferred for a mas-

sive section to reduce the heat of hydration .

5. Portland Pozzolan cement is a slow hardening con-

crete.

6. High Alumina cernent.

 I'

SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE CONCRETE

The High Alumina Cement is sometimes called aluminous mm. The choice from the above sizes depends upon th!:! dimen-
cement.or "Cement Fundu". It's chemical composition is dif- sion of the concrete member, however, a good practice demands
ferent from that of portland cement with predominant alumina that the maximum size of the gravel should not exceed 25% of
oxide contents of at least 32% by weight. The Alumina lime ra- the minimum thickness of the member nor exceed the clear dis-
tio is within the limit of 0.85 to 1.3%. This type of cement has tance between the reinforcing bars and the form. The aggregate
a very high rate of strength development.as compared to the or- shall be small enough for the concrete mix to flow around the
dinary portland cement. Aside from it!s rapid hardening proper- reinforcement ready for compaction.
ties, it can resist chemical atta9k l:iy sulphate.and weak acids in-
cluding sea water. It could also_ withstand prolonged exposure
to high temperature of more than, 1,000° C. Alumina cement is
not advisable for mixture with any other types of cement. 1-2 THE PRINCIPLES OF CONCRETE MIXING

The purpose in concrete m 1xing is ~o select an optimum

The main composition ,of cement are:
proportion of cement, water and aggregates to produce a con-
1. 60 to 65% Lime crete that will satisfy the requirements of strength, workability,
2. 18 - 25% Silica durability.and economy.
3. 3 - 8% Alumina
The final proportion which will be adopted in cdncrete
4. :5 - 5% Iron Oxide
mixing must be established by actual trial and adjustment on
5. 2- 5% Magnesia
site in order to attain the desired strength of concrete as re-
6. 1- 5% Sulfur Trioxide
i quired.

Aggregates. The aggregates us.ed in concrete work are di- a} Th~ water cement ratio is first chosen to meet the
vided into two categories. requirements of strength and durability.

b} The aggregate cement ratio is then chosen to sa-

a. Coarse Aggregate such as crushed stone, crushed
gravel or natural gravel with partic.les retained on a 5 mm tisfy the workabi I ity requirements.
sieve.
In the firial analysis, the water content is the most impor-
b. Fine Aggregaie such as crushed stone sand, crushed tant factor to consider since it influences not only the strength
gravel sand or natural sand with particles passing on a 5 and durability of the concrete but also the workability of the
mm sieve. fresh concrete in actual pouring inside the forms.

Size of Aggregates. For coarse aggregate or gravel, the ma- The most important requirements of concrete are summa-
ximum nominal size are usually 40 mm, 20 mm, 14 mm or 10 '1
I rized as follows:
1,

,·1:
I
2 ii 3
11

LII
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE CONCRETE

1. Fresh concrete must be workable which means simply means a reduction of about 3 kilos of cement per bag.
that it could freely flow to fill all voids inside the form. Such changes requires adjustment of al I measurements relative
to the proportion of concrete.
2. The hardened concrete must be strong enough to
carry the designed loiad. The traditional measurement of a box being used to mea-
sure the sand and gravel is 12 inches wide , by 12 inches long
and 12 inches high having a net volume of 1 cubic foot. This
3. The hardened concrete could withstand the con-
ditions to which it is exposed to serve. measurement will be changed to 30 x 30 x 30 cm. box which
will be the basis of the values presented on Table 1-2 Concrete
Proportion and all computations for estimating concrete.
4. Concrete should be economically produced.
Very recently, a 50 kg. weight per bag of cement was re-
leased in the market for commercial purposes. This ne\J\I deve-
Concrete mix may either be classified as "Designed or Pres- lopment was already incorporated in our tables and illustrations
cribed" which the reader would see the comparative variations of the
number of cement per cub,ic meter of a requirect class -of mix-
ture. (See Table 1-2)
Designed mix - where the contractor is responsible
in selecting the mixture proportion to achieve the required
strength and workability. TABLE 1-1 CONVERSION FROM INCHES·To METER
Number Accurate Approximate Number Accurate Approximate
Value Value Value Value
Prescribed mix - where the designing engineer speci- .0254 ,025 21 . .5334 .525
2 .0508 .050 22 .5588 .550
fy the mixture proportion. The contractor's responsibility 3 .0762 .075 23 .5842 .575
is only to provide a properly mixed concrete containing 4 .1016 .JOO 24 .6096 .600
the right proportion. 5 .1270 .125 25 .6350 .625
6 .1524 .150 26 .6604 .650
7 .1778 .175 27 .6858 .675
1-3 UNIT OF MEASURES 8 .2032 .200 28 .7112 .700
9 .2286 .225 29 .7366 .7,25
10 .2540 .250 30 .7620 ·.750
Prior to the adoption of the metric measure which is other- 11 ;2794 .275 31 .7874 .775
_6{ [ 12 .3048 .300 32 .8128 .800
wise known as the System International (SI). solid-concrete ]3 .3302 .325 33 .8382 .825
structure is estimated in terms of cubic meter, while the compo- 14 .3556 .350 34 .8636 .850
nents of concrete which are cement aggr§!gates and water are 15 .3810 .375 35 .8890 .875
16 .4064 .400 36 .9144 .900
measured in terms of pounds, cubic foot and gallons per bag res-
17 .4318 .425 37 .9398 .925
pectively. Lately, after the acceptance of the SI units of mea- 18 .4572 .450 38 .9652 .950
sure, the 94 pounds per bag of cement which is equivalent to 19 .4826 .475 39 · .9906 ;975
42.72 kg. was changed and fixed at 40 kilos per bag. This 20 .5080' .500 ,40 1..0160 1.000

4
5
 CONCRETE
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

c) To convert inches to meter, iust remember the

The values presented in Table 1-1 could serve in two pur-
following values of equivalent.
poses, one for the a~curate conversion of distance from English
to Metric and the other approximate value for our s·implified .025 m.
1 inch =
methods of estimating. .050 m.
2 inches =
3 inches = .075 m.
Comments: 4 inches = .100 m.

1) In solving problems, the probability of committing error

is possible if more number is used.
Note that all length in inches are divisible by any one of these
Example: · four numbers and could be easily converted into meter by sum-
ming up their divisible equivalent.
It is easier to use .10 m the equivalent of 4 inches
than the exact value of .1016, be it by multiplication or
by division processes.
Example:
8 1) What is the meter length equivalent of 7 inches?
~ = 80 by inspection and analysis
By simple analysis 7" could be the sum of 4 and 3
8
78.7 by long process of division or by the
.1016 Therefore:
aid of a calculato_r.
4 inches = .l00m.
2) The reader has no time to memorize the values given
3 inches = .075 m.
on Table 1-1, but by using a simple guide, anybody could easily
get its equivalent from English to Metric. = .175 n,.
Answer

Example: 2) How about 21 inches to meter?

5 X 4" = 20" = .500 m.
a) Conversion from meter to feet, just divide· the
plus l"
1" = .025 m.
length by .30 say 6.00 m 21" = .525 m.
=;, 20 ft. Answer
.30·

b) To convert feet to meter multiply by .30 Using the simple guide, convert any number from inches
to meter as an exercise problem.
30 ft. X .30 = 9.00 m.
7

l
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
CONCRETE

1-4 CONCRETE PROPORTION

It will be noted that the _volume of sand and gravel for all
The most acceptable way of proportioning concrete is the class of mixture is con::tant at .50 cu. m. and 1.0 cu. m. respec-
volume method using a box for sand and gravel as explained in tively. This is true on the assumption thatthe cement paste er:i-
Section 1-3 Uhit of Measure. The reasons behind it's traditional. ters the void of the sand and at the same instance the combina-
acceptance and use is the convenience in measuring and fast tion of these two materials fil!s the void of the gravel and there-
handling of the aggregates from the stock pile-to the mixer. after mixing, a solid mass is formed called solid concrete.
Not everybody could afford a weighing scale equipment for'this
purpose, besides this volume method of concrete proportion Based from actual concreting work, one cubic meter of
had long been proven to be effective and successful. gravel plus on~ half cubic meter sand mixed with cement paste
will obtain a little bit more than one cubic meter solid con-
crete. The little excess over one cubic meter wiH be considered
as contingencies.

r
0.30 m. Comments:
J_
-,a <"'
In actual construction work, there are several factors that
-_,~ might affect the accuracy of the estimate which needs special
consideration they are: ,
Box for 40 kg. cement
Box for 50 kg. cement
1) Inaccurate volume of delivered aggregate by the
MEASURING BOX
supplier is very common.

FIGURE 1-1
2) Dumping of aggrl;)gates on uneven _ground and
grassy area reduces its usable volume.

3) l'nadequate measuring of aggregates during the

TABLE]~ CONCRETEPROPORT
. . ---v, . . ,v mixing operation affects the quantity of cement as com-
CLASS MIXTURE CEMENT SAND puted, on the otherhand, over measuring of aggregates per
~
GRAVEL
m. c;u. m. batch of mixture might also affect the strength of the con-
-- 40 kg./bag 50 kg./bag CU:
, crete. 'This is also a common practice when the work is on
AA ]: ; 1½: 3 12.0 its momentum where the laborers fail to observed the im-
9.5 .50 1.0
A 1: 2 :4 9.0 7.0 portance of the measuring box.
B .50 1.0
1 : 2½: 5 7.5 6.0 -
C
.50 1.0
,1 : 3 :6 6.0 4) The use of ordinary gravel (not the crushed
5.0 .50 1.0
- stone) needs screening to conform with the specifications,
8

9
 CONCRETE
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

considerably the screening processes reduces. the usable Solution:

volume of the coarse aggregate or gravel.
1. Determine the volume of the proposed concrete, pave-
5) The cement and fine aggregate used for grouting ment;convert 4 inches = .10 m.
purposes to secure the bond of concrete joints are com-
monly overlooked in the estimates. V = .10 X 3:00 X 5.00
V = 1.5 cu. m.
6) Cement waste due to bag breakage are usually
caused by wreckless handling and hauling. 2. Referring to Table 1-2 using 40 kg. cement and class
"C" mixture, multiply:
7) Pilferages of materials could be avoided if there
is a good system of construction management. Cement: 1.5 X 6 = 9
bags
Sand 1.5 X .50 = .75 cu. m.
Gravel : 1.5 X 1.0 = i.50cu. m.
1-~ CONCRETE SLAB

The discussion from cement to concrete proportions plus Suppose ·there is no available 40 kg. cement in the
the Tables presented could be meaningful and appreciated only market and what is available is a 50 kg./bag cement. How·
if accompanied by examples of actual applications. many bags will be ordered._

ILLUSTRATION 1-1

A proposed concrete pavement has a general dimensions of Solution:

4 inches thick, 3.00 meters wide and 5.00 meters long. Consi-
1) Knowing that the .volume as computed is 1.5 cu. m.
dering the slab to be resting on the ground fill, determine the
number of cement in bag, sand and gravel required using class
2) Refer to Table 1-2 under 50 kg. cement using
C mixture.
class "C" mixture multiply:

-
.-J: O 10
'
.
(1'\· Cement:
Sand
Gravel :
1~
15
15 xln
X
X
5
5
=
=
=
7.5 bags
.75 cu. m.
1.5 cu. m.

3) Since you cannot buy -7.5 bags, order 8 bags.

FIGURE 1-2
11
10
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
CONCRETE

ILLUSTRATION 1-2 '

1

1-6 ESTIMATING BY TH E AREA METHOD

· A barangay road 4.00 m. wide and one kilometer long
after the base preparation requires concreting. Find the num- The preceding illustration is the volume method which
ber of bags cement, sand and gravel· in cu. m. required using could be simplified further by the area method with the aid of
class "A" concrete if the slab is 15 cm. thick. Table 1-3.

TABLE 1-3 QUANTITY OF CEMENT, SAND AND GRAVEL ON

I
LS PER SQUARE METER
4.oo tn. l__l o.15 "'·,. MIXTURE CLASS
SAND GRAVEL
-r Thick-
40 kg. Cemen_t Per Bag 50 kg. Cement Per Bag
oess in
cm.
A B C B C cu. m.
5.0 .450 .375 .30 .350 .300 .250 .0250 .050

7.5 .'675 .563 .45 .525 .450 .375 .0375 .075

10.0 .900 .750 ;so .700 .600 .500 .0500 .100.

FIGURE·l-3
12.5 1.125 .938 .75 .875 .750 .625 .0630 .125
Solution
15.0 1.350 1.125 .90 1.050 .900 .750 .0750 .150

1. Determine the volume of the concrete road 17.5 J·.575 1.313 1.05 1.225 1.050 .875 .0880 .175

20.0' 1.800 1.500 1.20 1.400 1.200 1.000 .1000, .200

.15 m. x 4.00 x 1,000 m. (1 km.)
V = 600 cu. m. 22.5 2.030 1.688 1.35 1.575' 1.350 1.125 .1125 .225

2. Referring to Table 1-2 using 40 kg. per bag, multiply: 25.0 2.250, 1.875 1.50 1.750 1.500 1.250 .1250 .250

Cement: 600 X 9 27.5 2.475 2 ..063 1.65 , 1.925 1.650 1.375

Sand.
= 5,400 bags .1380 .275
600 X .50 = 300 cu. m. 30.0 2.700 2.250 1.80 2.100 1.800
I

Gravel : ,1.500 .1500 .300

600 X 1.0 = . 600 cu. m.

If no 40 kg. cement available, a 50 kg. per bag requires:

ILLUSTRATION 1-.3
Cement: 600 x 7 = 4,200 bags
Gravel _and Sand: the same as computed above.
Adopting the problem of illustration 1-1 and 1-2 using
12 Table 1-3 the solution will be:

13
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE CONCRETE

For illustration 1-1

I

1) Solve for the pavement area

A = 3.00 x 5.00 m-.

I y
X X
T m.

A = 15 sq. m.
I
r
4.00 m. . -- '
2) Referring to Table 1-3 if thickness is 10 cm.
under class "C" 40 kg. cemen,t multiply:

Cement: 15 sq. m. x .60 = 9 basis

Sand 15 sq. m. x .05 ;= .75 cu. m.
Gravel : 15 sq. m. x .100= 1.5 cu. m.
~imi-------1
0.2.5 m.

Cross Section X-X

For illustration - 1-2
FIGURE 1-4
1) Find the area o~ the concrete barangay road
4.00 x 1,000 = 4,000sq.m.
Solution

2) If the thickness is 15 cm. class "A" concrete from

Table 1-3, multiply:
1. Find the volume cif one column

V = .25 x .30 m. x 5.00 m (ht.)

Cement: 4,000 x 1.35 = 5,400 bags V = .375cu.m.
Sand : 4,000 x .075 = 300 cu. m.
Gravel : 4,000 x .150 = 600 cu. m. 2. Find the total volume of the 8 columns

1-7 CONCRETE COLUMN V = .375 x 8

V = 3.0 cu. m.
ILLUSTRATION 1-4
3. Refer to Table 1-2 using class "A" concrete.
Multiply:
A concrete column is 5.00 m high with a cross sec-
tional dimensions of 25 cm. x 30 cm. If there are 8 co- Cement: 3.0 x 9 = 27 bags@ 40 kg.
lumns of the same size. Find the required cement, sand Sand 3.0 x .50 = 1.5_ cu. m.
and gravel if the plan specifies class "A" concrete.
Gravel : 3.0 x 1.0 = 3.0 cu. m.

14
15
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
CONCRETE

1-8 ESTIMATING BY THE LINEAR METER METHOD

Again the method of computing the materials required for 35 X 35 1.103 .919 .858 .735 .061 .123
columns beams and girders could be simplified further with the 35 X 40 1.260 1.050 .980 .840 .070 .140
aid of Table 1-4. 35 X 45 1.418 1.181 1.103 .945 .079 .158
35 X 50 1.57.5 1.313 1.225 1.050 .088 .175
35 X 55 1.733 1.444. 1.348 1.155 .096 .193
35 · X 60 1.890 1.575 1.470 1.260 .105 .210

40 X 40 1.440 i .200 1.120 .960 .080 .160

TABLE 1-4 QUANTITY OF CEMl;NT, SAND AND GRAVEL 40 X 45 1.620 i .350 1 ;260 1.080 .090 .180
FOR POSTS, BEAMS AND GIRDERS PER METER LENGTH 40 X 50 1.800 1.500 1.400 1.200 .100 .200
SIZES
i'l cm.
MIXTURE
CLASS
40 X 55 1.980 1.650 1.540 1.320 .110 .220
Cemerit iri Bags 40 kg. SANO GRAVEL
Cemerit iri Bags 50 kg. iri 40 X 60 2.160 1.800 1.680 1.440 .120 .240
A B iri
A B cu. m .
45 X 45 1.823 1.519 1.418 1.215 .101 .203
15 X 15 .203 1.688
.169 .158 .135 45 X 50 2.025 , 1.575 1.350 :113 .225
15 X 20 .270 .011 .023
.225 .210 .180 45 X 55 2.228 1.856 1.733 1.485 .124 .248
15 X 25 .338 .. 015 .030
.281 .263 .225 45 X 60 2.430 2.025 1.890 1.620 .135 .270
15 X 30 .405 .019 .038
.338 .315 .270
15
15
X 35 .473 .394 .368 .315
.023 .045
50 50 2.250 1.875
- 1.750 1.500 .125 .250
X 40 .540 .450 .026 .053 X
.420 .360 50 55 2.475 2.063 1.925 1 .'650 .138 .275
.030. .060 X

20 X 20 50 X 60 2.700 2.250 2.100 1.800 .150 .300

.360 .300 .280
20 X 25 .240 .020
.450 .375 .350 .040
20 X 30 .300 .025 55 X 60 2.970 2.475 2.310 1.980 .165 .330
.540 .450 .420 .050
20 X 35 .360 .030 55 X 70 3.465 2.888 2.695 2.310 .193 - .385
.630 .525 .490
I
.060
20 .420 .035 55 X 80 3.960 3.300 3.080 2.640 .220 .440
X 40 .720 .600 .070
.560 .480 55 X 90 4.455 3.713 3.465 2.970 .248 .495
.040 .080
25 55 X 100 4.950 4.125 3.850 3.300 .275 .550
X 25 .563 .469
25 .438 .375
X 30 .675 .563 .031 .063
25 .525 .450 60 X 60 3.240 2.700 2.520 2.160 .180 .360
X 35 .788 .656 .038 .075
.613 .525 60 X 70 3.780 3.150 2.940 2.520 .210 .420
25 X 40 .900 .044 .088
.750 :700 60 X 80 4.320 3.600 3.360 2.880 .240 ·.480
25 .X 45 .600 .050
1.013 .844 .788 .JOO 60 X 90 4.860 , 4.050 3.780 3.240 .270 .540
25 X so 1.125 .675 .056
.938 .875 .113 60 X 100 5.400 4.500 4.200 3.600 .300 .600
.750 .063 .125
30 X 30 .810 .675 .630 65 60 3.510 2.925 2.730 2.340 .195 .390
.045 -
X
30 X 35 .540
.945 .788 .735 .090 65 X 70 4.095 3.413 3.185 2.730 .228 .455
30 X 40 .630 .053·
1.080 .900 .840 .105 65 X 80 4.680 3.900 3.640 3.120 .260 .520
30 X 45 .720 .060
1.215 1.013 .945 .120 65 X 90 5.265 4.388 4.095 3.510 .293 .585
30 X so 1.350 1.125 1.050
.810 .068 .J 35 65 X 100 5.850 4.875 4.550 . 3.900 .325 .650
.900 .075 .ISO

16
17
 1
CONCRETE
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

70 X. 70 4.410 3.675 3.430 2.940 .245 .490

1-9 POST AND FOOTING
70 X 80 5.040 4.200 3.920 3.360 .280 .560
70 X 90 5.670 4.725 4.410 3.780 .315 .630
70 X 100 6.300 5.250 4.900 4.200 .350 .700 ILLUSTRATION 1-5
A concrete column 4.00 m high with· a cross sec-
75 X 70 4.725 3.938 3.675 3.150 .263 .525
3.600 tional dimension of 20 cm. x 25 cm. is resting on a con-
75 X 80 5.400 4.500 4.200 .300 .600
75 X 90 6.075 5.063 4.725 4.050 . .338 .675 crete footing 20 cm. thick by 80 cm. square. If class "B"
75 X 100 6.750 5.625 5.250 4.500 .375 .750 concrete is specified, find the quantity of cement, sand
and gravel if there are 12 columns of the same size.
80 X 80 5.760 4.800 4.480 3.840 .320 .640
80 X 90 6.480 5.400 5.040 4.320 .360 .720
80 X 100 7.200 6.000 5.600 4.800 .400 .800
4.00m.
85 X 80 6.120 5.100 4.760 4.080 .340 .680
85 X 90 6.885 · 5.738 5.355 4.590 .383 .765
~ o 25 m.
11
85 X 100 7.650 6.375 5.950 5.100 .425 .850
J0.80 m.

90 X 90 7.290 6.075 5.670 4.860 .405 .810 ·0.20 m. '

90 X 100 8.100 6.750 6.300 5.400 .450 .900 ~· l~,om.
·1

95 X 90 7.695 6.413 5.985 5.130 .428 .855 ~0.80m. I I

95 X 100 8.550 7.125 6.650 5.700 . .475 .950 L - o.so m .______..\
100 X 100 9.000 7.500 7.000 6.000 .500 1.000
FIGURE 1-5

Adopting the problem of illustration 1-4 using Table 1-4 Solution

the solution follows:
A) Column
1. Find the total length of the 8 columns I
l. Find the total length of the 12 columns
8 x 5 m. ht. == 40 mts.
12 X 4 = 48 m. "·
2. Refer to Table 1-4, class "A" concrete for a
2. Refer to Table 1-4 along the 20 x 25 column
25 x 30 cm. column size size under class "B" mixture, multiply:

3. Multiply: Cement: 48 m. x .375 = 18 bags at 40 kg.

.I
Sand : 48 m x .025 = 1.2 cu. m.
Cement: 40 X .675 = 27 .0 bags Gravel : 48 m. x .050 = 2.4 cu. m.
Sand 40 X .038 = 1.52 cu. m.
Gravel : 40 X .075 = 3.0cu:m. 19
18
 CONCRETE
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

Solution
8) Footing Slab
'
A. Footing Slab
1. Find the area of the footing
l. Solve for the volume of "F"
A = 12 pcs. x .80 x .80 = 7.68 sq. m.
V = .15 X .80 X .80
2. Refer to Table 1-3 along. the 20 cm. thick slab
= .096 cu. m.
class "B" mixture multiply:

Cement 7.68 X 1.50 = 11.52 bags 2. Multiply by 4 pcs.

0.384
Sand 7.68 X · .100 = .76 cu. m. .096 X 4 - - - =
Gravel 7.68 X .200 = 1.53 cu. m.
B. Pedestal
C) Summary of A & B: 1. Solve for the volume of "P"

Cement 18 + 11.52 = 29.52 say 30 bags V = .30 x .30 x .90

Sand 1.2 + .76 = 1.96 say 2 cu. m . = .081
Gravel 2.4 + L53 = 3.93 say 4 cu. m.
2. Multiply by 4 pcs.
- 0 ..324
.081 X 4
ILLUSTRATION 1·6

From Figure 1-5 determine the number of 40 kg. cement

including the sand and gravel required, using class "A" concrete
for the footing and class "C'' for the flooring.
Total volume - = 0.708 cu.

3. Using class "A" concrete from Table 1-2

m.

Multiply:

r----, ~nm 0.30 m. .708 X

9 = 6.37 bags @ 40 k.gs.
'f.;.,•:
I . I t=atr
L_J_J I
0.30m ..
.Cement
Sand .708 X
.50 == .354 cu. m .
1.0 = .708 cu. m.
L ----'

p1I Gravel .708 X

;T_~-~
,-~r rom. I , ' 'i'°m C. Concrete Slab

1---E!ll F ! Jo.ism. 1. Oeterm ine the volume of the slab

Lt_J
I~

4.00m.~~
L 0.80m.-4 •
V == .10 x 3.00 x 4.00
I
= 1.2 cu. m.
FIGURE 1-6
21
_______, Io, 10 fl!
20

l
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
CONCRETE

2) Using class "C" mixture frorn Table 1-2

Multiply: 1-10 RECTANGULAR COLUMN

Cement 1.2
Sand
X 6 = 7.2 bags@ 40 kg~. ILLUSTRATION 1-7
1.2 X .50 = 0.6 cu. m.
Gravel 1.2 X 1.0 = 1.2 cu.-m. A series of 8 concrete columns with cross-sectional di-
mension of 40 x 60 cm. is supporting a girder each having

SUMMARY
r, a clear height of 5.00 meters. Find the quantity of cement
at 50 k~. per bag, sand and gr_avel using class "A" mixture.
Total Cement:
6.37 + 7.2 = 13.57 say 14 bags
Sand .354 + 0.6 .95 say 1 cu. m.
Gravel : .708+ 1.2 = I :1

1.9 say 2 cu. m. '

Comment:
I l l Om.
A A
5i°
To a meticulous estimator, the floor area occupied by
i
the footing will be subtracted from the floor area or ./
volume. ·
. --T I

Problem exercise: ·
.~ :·_tm .. I
I
I

1.40 m~J
Using the same problem of illustration 1-6, solve for the Cross Section AA
quantity of-cement at 50 kg. per bag, the sand and gravel in cu-
. FIGURE 1-7 , I
I
bic meter using the linear meter method and the area method of
estimating.

Note: Solution

l. By I inear meter method:

The answer for cement quantity will not tally with the Find the total length of the 8 columns
14 bags as computed in the preceding solution because we
are using 50 kg. per bag cement. H'owever, the answer could 8 x 5 = 40 meters
be checked and compared by converting the number of bags
into kilograms. For sand and gravel the answer will be the 2. Refer to Table 1-4 along the 40 x 60 cm.
same. column size under class "A" measure of
50 kg./ bag cement
22
I
! 23
~
 CONCRETE
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

Solution
Multiply:

Cement 40 x 1.680 = 67 .2 bags

1. Solve for the volume of the beam
Sand 40 X .120 = 4.8 cu. m.
Gravel 40 X .240 = 9.6 cu. m. 4 pcs. x .25 x .40 x 8.00 m. long
V = 3.2 !=LI- m.

Problem exercise: 2. Find the volume of the girder

V = 2 pcs. x .50 x .75 x 12.00 m.
Adopting the same problem of illustration 1-7, solve·
for cement at 40 kg. and 50 kg: per bag including the sand V = 9 cu. m.
and gravel required by volume method. Check your answer
by comparison for cement weight in kg. 3. Total volume
3.2 + 9 = 12.2 cu. m.
1-11 RECTANGULAR BEAM AND GIRDER
4. 'Refer to Table 1-2 using 40 kg. cement ysing class
ILLUSTRATION 1-8
"A" mixture multiply:

From Figure 1-8, prepare the bill of materials for

Cement: 12.2 x 9 = 109.8 say 110 bags
the rectangular beam and girder using class "A" concrete.
Sand ·. 12.2 x .50 = 6.1 cu. m.
Gravel : 12.2 x 1.00 = 12.2 cu. m.

r'1] ~
OJ
~
"'
OJ
~.,
OJ
~.,
OJ
7·~'t~?
0.40m. \i:.\
J
. u,;s,,
.
r
5 m.
1-12 CIRCULAR COLUMN

Girder 0.25 m.
~
0.S0'm. ILLUSTRATION l-9
BEAM GIRDER
A circular column with a cross-sectional diameter of
J2.00m.
60 cm. has a clear height of 6.00 meters. Find the quanti-
ty of cement, sand and gravel required using class "A" con-
crete if there are 5 columns in a row of the same size.
FIGURE 1-8
25

24
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
CONCRETE

Another method in solving for a circular column is with

the aid of Table 1- 5 where the quantity of cement, sand and
gravel per linear meter are given at specified diameter.

6.00 m.
A A TABLE 1-5 QUANTITY OF CEMENT AND AGGREGATE PER
LINEAR METER OF A CIRCULAR COLUMN

4.S0m . ..j_ Circular Columns

Section AA
Diameter
CEMENT in BAGS
40 kg. 50 kg,,
in Mixture Mixture SAND GRAVEL
cm. A B A B cu. m. cu. m.

25 .442 .368 .344 .295 .025 .059

FIGURE 1-9 30 .636 .530 .495 .424 ·.035 .071
35 .866 .722 .673 .577 .048 .096
40 1.131 .942 ;880 .754 .063 .126
Solution 45 1.431 1.193 1.113 .954 .080 .159
50 1.767 1.473 1.374 1.178 .098 .196
1. Solve.for the cross sectional area 55 2.138 1.782 1.663 1.425 .119 .238
60 2.545 2.121 1.979 1.696 .141 .283
A = TTr 2 65 .2.986 2.488 2.323 1.991 .166 .332
A = 3.1416 x .30 2 70 3,.464 2.866 2.694 2.3Q9 .192 .385
f'
A = .283 sq. m. 75 3.976 3.313 3.093 2.651 .221 .442
80 4.524 3.770 3.519 3.016 .251 .503.
2. Find the volume cif the 5 columns 85 5.107 4.256 3.972 3.405 .284 .567
90 5.726 4.771 4.453 3.817 .318 .636
V =5 100 7.069 5.890 5.498 4.712 .393 .785
pcs. x .283 x 6 m.
V = 8.49 cu. m.

3. Refer to Table 1-2 using class "A" concrete Solving the above problem using Table 1-5 the. procedure
Multiply: follows
1. Find the total length of the column,s
Cement: 8.49 x 9 = 76.4 bags 6.00 m. ht. x 5 pcs. = 30 m.
Sand 8.49 x -~O = 4.2 cu. m.
Gravel : 8.49 x 1.0 = 8.49 ed. m. 2. Refer to Table 1-5 along the .60 m: diameter
column.
26 I
r-
.f 27'
 CONCRETE
SIMPUFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

Multiply: ILLUSTRATION 1-10

A road construction requires 12 pcs. concrete pipes
Cement . 30 x 2.545 = 76.3 bags
at 90 cm. diameter for drainage purposes. Oeterm ine the
Sand 30 x .141 = 4.2 cu. m.
quantity of cement, sand and gravel required for the manu- .
Gravel 30 X :283 = 8.49cu.m.
facture of said pipes using class "A" concrete (except for.
the reinforcement which will be discussed in Chapter 3).
1 -13 CONCRETE PIPES

t- 1.00 m.,--j -$-···

._ ;_ . ·:_~·.·: - . :,· -.:
; ·•· · ·•· . ::t}·
[L. . :. d;
r[:::
1.10 m.
.
-,
:\
.

;··---
I ..
.

... ---ill- .. ~ D I l\ll4'

FIGURE 1-10 .;. J1,_. . .

·2~k~::s- ···.
0:-
~ ..,;...~. ~
. t ',,~
TABLE 1-6 QUANTITY OF CEMENT, SAND AND GRAVEL

Diameter
PER CONCRETE PIPE
CEMENT IN KILOS SAND GRAVEL
-t'- 1 -~O m. =----1-f
Concrete Pipe
in Class of Mixture in in
cm cu. m. cu. m. 'I

D.o di A B FIGURE 1-1'

25 15 11 .31 9.42 .016, .0314.
30 20 14.14 11.78 .020 .0400
40 25 27.57 · 22.97 .038 .0770 1st Solution
45 30 31.81 26.51 .044 .0884
55 40 4029 33.58 .056 .1120 L Find the gross volume of the pipe
60 45 44.53 37.11 .062 .1240 2
65 50 48.77 40.64 .068 - .1360 V = .7854 0 h 2 0

80 60 79.17 65.97 .110 .2200 V = .7854 X 1.10 X 1.00 m. ht.

85 65 84.82 70.69 .118 .2360 V = .95 cu. m.
90 70 90.48 75.40 .126 .2510
95 75 96.13 ·• 80.11 .134 .2670
100 80 101.79 84.82 .141 .2830 2.
'
Find the volume of the hole
110 90 113.. 10 94.25 .157 .3140
120 100 124.41 103.67 .173 .3460 V = .7854 x d2.h
145 120. 187.32 156;10 .260 .5200 V = .7854 x.90 2 x l.00m.ht.
175 150 229.73 191.44 .319 .6380 V = .636
29

28
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

3. Subtract the result of 2 from 1

chapter 2
.95 - .636 = .314 ..:•7

4. Volume of 12 pipes

12 X .314 = 3.77
MASONRY ·1
5. Refer to Table 1-2 using class "A" mixture
Multiply:
CONCRETE HOLLOW BLOCKS
\-.
Cement: 3.77 X 9 ::::: 33.93 bags
Sand 3.77 X .5 = 1.88 cu. m. Concrete Hollow Blocks are classif)ed as bearing and
Gravel 3.77 X 1.0 = 3.77 cu. m. non-bearing blocks. Load bearing blocks are those whose
thickness ranges from 15 cm. to 20 cm. and are used to carry
,, . load aside from its own weight. Non-bearing blocks on. the
2nd Solution
•t:I _otherhand, are blocks which are intended for walls, parti-
1. Refer to Table 1-6 for a di= 90.cm. ~ pipe tions, fences o~ dividers carrying its own weight whose thick-
1

ness ranges from 7 .5 cm. to 10 cm.

Multiply:

Cement: 113.10 _x 12 pcs. = 1,357.20 kg.

Convert Cement to number of bags:

1,357.20 kg. _
40 kg. = 33.93 bags

For 50 kg. cement: I

I

FIGURE 2-1
1 ,35 7 .20 kg.
= 2 7 .14 bags
50 kg.
Concrete Hollow Blocks has three whole cells ·and two
Sand : 12 pcs. x .157 cu. m. = 1.88 cu. m. on·e half eel Is at both ends having a total of four ."These eel Is
Gravel: 12 pcs. x .314 cu. m. = 3.77 cu. m. vary in sizes as there are different manufacturers using diffe-

30 31
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
MASONRY

rent moulds. The varying sizes of the cells will affect the esti-
mated quantity of materials. For this reason, it is recommen- 3. Addition of cement to over exposed mixed mortar not
ded that t.he bigger cell be adopted in our computation. used or applied on time.
·i
4. The excess mortar for installation of hollow blocks are
In computing the required materials for concrete hollow
usually dumped in a certain corner of t_he construction
block works, the estimator has to consider the following
items: site. This is a common practice especially after work-
ing hou~s where no overtime pay is authorized.
1. Quantity of the concrete ·hollow blocks.
These are considered as minor thing in the construction
2. Quantity of the cement and sand for block laying
mortar. work which are simply overlooked, but summing them up for
a months work will surprisingly result to a figu're beyond ex-
3. Quantity of the cement and sand for mortar to fill pectation affecting the estimate.
the hollow cell of every block. \

4. The cement and sand required for plastering one or

two sides of the blocks.
TABLE 2-1 QUANTITY OF CEMENT AND SAND FOR
5. The materials for CHS footing and concrete post as STER MIXTURE PER CUBIC METER
required.
CEMENT ir.i BAGS SAND
6. The steel reinforcements and tie wires to be treated
CLASS 40 kg. SO kg. cu. m.
separately in Chapter 3. MIXTU~E

A 1:2 18.0 14.5 1.0

B 1 :3 12;0 9.5 1.0
l
!·
C 1 :4 9.0 7.0 1.0
Other factors that might affect the estimated quantity of
materials D 1:5 7.5 6.0 1.0

. '
1. Improper measure of aggregates during the block lay-
Illustration 2-1
ing work. The most common attitude of the worker is
to mix sand and gravel with cement disregarding the
measuring box. [ From Figure 2-2, determine the number of 10 x 20 x 40
II cm. concrete hollow blocks and the required materials for:
2. Sometimes the mason prepares a box for measuring I
sand or gravel not in accordance with the specified
measurement.
I. a) mortar for block laying
b) mortar for plastering and
c) footing, using class "B" mixture
32

f
r 33
l
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCT,ION ESTIMATE MASONRY

r ·. B. Mortar for Block Laying: Average thickness@ .0125

- <t.oo .

-fTl
• Ir}_ •
cJ:) 1. Find the volume of the mortar (one layer)
'b-

A"' CHB y=txwxL

.
i ~J
-~t;§l
V = .0125 X .10 20 m.
'Im.
~ X

/ Mo,ra, , I .al = .025 cu. m.

.15 m.
2. Multiply by the number of layers to get the ~otal
volume.·
~-
()() Total V = .025 x 15
'o·

/1/ = .375 cu. m .

3. Refer to Table 2-1 using class "B" mixture 40 kg.

FIGURE 2-2 cement
Multiply:
Solution - 1 Cement .375 x 12 = 4.5 bags
Sand .375_ X 1.0 = .3.75 CU. m.
l.
A. Concrete Hollow Blocks
C. Mortar filler for hollow cell
1. Divide the height of the fence by the height of
one block . -os,,,_
1. Find the volume of one cell

@
.
.
.3.00 m .
= 15 pcs. V = .05 X .075 X .20 .2om. · .
.20m
V = .00075 cu. m. 75 m.

2. Divide the total length of the fence by t-he length of 1

2. Volume of 4 cells per block
CHS Cell

one block.
20.00 m . V = .00075 x 4
· . = 50 pcs.
.40 m. V = .003

3. Multiply the result of 1 and 2. ·

15 x 50 = 750 pcs. 3. Total volume of cells for 750 CHB
35
34.
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
MASONRY

V = .003 x 750
V = 2.25 cu. m. V = .15 x .40 x 20.00
V = 1.20 cu. m.

4. Refer to Table 2-1 using class "B" mixture 40 kg. 2. Refer to Table 1-2 using class "B" concrete 40 kg.
cement ..
cement
Multiply:
Multiply: i
Cement Cement: 1.20 x 7.5 = 9 bags
2.25 x 12 = 27 bags Sand 1.20 X ,.50 = .60 CU. m.
Sand
2.25 X 1.0 = 2.25 CU. m. Gravel : 1.20 X 1.0 = 1.20 CU. m.

Summary of the Materials

D. Plastering at an average of 16 mm (.016 m.) thick
1. Concrete Hollow Blocks - - - - - - - 750 pcs.
1. 2.-40kg.Cement ------
Find the area of the fence (one side) 63.54 say 64 bags

3.00 x 20 = 60 sq. m. 3. Sand -----· 5.145 cu. m.

4. Gravel 1.20 cu. m.
2. Find the area of the two sides
Comments:
60 x 2 ~ 120sq.m_
1. What is lacking in this computation is the reinforcemenflo com-
3. Solve for the volume plete the CHB work, this item will be treated separately under the reih-
fo~cement topic in Chapter 3. ·
V = 120 X .016
2. The computation procedure as presented is classified under the
V = 1.92 cu. m. fundamental method which is complicated but could be simplified with
the aid of Table 2-2 and 2-3.

4. Refer to Table 2-1 using, class "B" mixture 40 kg.

' Multiply: TABLE 2-2 QUANTITY OF CEMENT AND SAND FOR CHB
Cement: MORT AR PER SQ. M.
Sand 1.92 x 12 = 23.04 bags
CEMENT IN BAGS
1.92 X 1.0 = 1.92 CU. m. _! 40 kg. 50 kg.
E. Footing SIZE OF CHB NUMBER MIXTURE MIXTURE
SAND
.in cm. PER sq. m. B C D B C D Ip
cu.. m.
1. Find the volume of the footing ;l · ·1 o x 20 le 40 12.5 .525 .394 .328 .416 .306 .263 .04375
I /'

~
15 X 20 X 40 12.5 1.013 .. 759 .633 .802 .591 .506 .08438
V=txwxL
20 X 20 X 40 12.5 1.500 1.125 .938 1.188 .875 .750 .. 12500
36

':n
 MASONRY
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

TABLE 2-3 QUANTITY OF CEMENT, SAND AND GRAVEL ~olution - 2

FOR CHB FOOTING PER LINEAR METER
CEMENT IN BAGS A. Concrete Hollow Blocks
DIMENSION CLASS OF MIXTURE
in cm. 40 kg. 50 kg. SAND GRAVEL 1. Find the area of the fence
t w A 8 A 8 cu. rn. cu.m.
3.00 x 20.00 m. = 60 sq. m.
10 30 .270 .225 .210 .180 .015 .030
10 35 .315 .263 .245 .210 .018 .035 2. Refer to Table 2-2, multiply:
10 40 .360 .300 .280 .240 .020 .040
10 50 .450 .380 .350 .300 .025 .050 60 x 12.5 = 750 pcs. CHB

15 40 .540 .450 .420 .360 .030 .060

.608 .473 .405 .034 .068
B. Mortar for Block laying and filler of the cell
15 45 .506
15 50 .675 .563 .525 .450 .038 .075 1. Referring to Table 2-2 using class "B" mixture 40
15 60 .810 .675 .630 .540 .045 .090
kg. cement
20 40 · .720 .600 .560 .480 .040 .080 Multiply:'
20 50 .900 .750 .700 .600 .050 .100 Cement : 60 x .525 = 31.5 bags
I
20 60 1.080 .900 .840 .720 .060 .120 60 X .04375 == 2.625 CU. m.
Sand

C. Plaster Mortar
lkJ
~- 1. Find the area to be plastered

r· -r:. -!~·
60 x 2 = 120 sq. m. two faces

-t 2. Referring to table 2-4 u_sing class "B" mixture 40

kg. cement
TABLE 2-4 QUANTITY OF CEMENT AND SAND FOR
Multiply:
PLASTERING PER SQ. M. * · 120 x .192 = 23.04 bags
C.ement
CLASS CEMENT IN BAGS SAND Sand
120 X .016 = 1.92 CU. m.
MIXTURE 40 kg. 50 kg. Cu. JV!.

A .288 .232 .016

8 .192 .152 .016
C .144 .112 .016 D. Footing
D .l20 .096 .016
,1. Determine the total length of the footing: = 20 m.
* Thickness computed at 16 mm.
39
38
 S(MPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
MASONRY

2. Referring to Table 2-3 using class "B" concrete:

For a 15 x 40 cm. Footing, Multiply: ILLUSTRATION 2-2

Cement: 20 m. x .450 == 9.0. bags From Figure 2-4 prepare the Bill of Materials using class
Sand 20 m. x .030 == .60 cu. m. "B" mixture.
Gravel : 20m. x .060 == l.20cu.m.
.20
~~
25.00
~ummary of the Materials
~ - CllHB

IT
I. Concrete Hollow Blocks - - - - - - 750 pcs. q.
2. 40 kg. Cement - ...... ____
63.54 say 64 bags 0
3. Sand --- ............ 5.145 cu. m. 0
ID N

4. Gravel ------- 1.20 cu. m. "'

ci_j_ ~-tL"~ , ,. _ r
G. L, - ·· .. . ...
__,.,___ ~-
Problem Exercise: t • j'·" "'"··•·· ,... ·".. . ~=,,~. l
10.00
--
10.uu
.60 f .40

From Figure 2-3, find the quantity of 15 cm. x 20 ~ 40

cm. CHS, 50 kg. cement per bag, sand and gravel required using FIGURE 2-4
class "B" mixture by fundamental methods and by the aid of
Tables. Solution

'A. Concrete Hollow Blocks

---h-..__1s.0 1. Find the total length or perimeter of the fence
~ i 0 _'n. ------..i.
20.00 <"· . -·-----=- i--r
I.
<" = 95 m.

~
P

z_OO 2. Subtract the space occupied by the ·posts

_)---
95 - (20 posts x .20)

:::::1 = 95 - 4
= 91 m. net length

~
1 --------- ~- Solve for the are.?! of the fence
A = 2 .40 x 91 m.
A = 218.4 sq. m.
FIGURE 2-3
4. Referring to Table 2-2
40
41

l
 MASONRY
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

Cement: 1.08 x 7.5 = 8.1 bags

Multiply:
Sand : 1.08 x .50 = .54 cu. m.
CHB: 218.4 x 12.5 = 2,730 pi:::s. Gravel : 1.08 x 1.0 = 1.08 cu. m.

B. Cement Mortar for Bl?ck Laying and Cell Filler

E. CHB Footing
1. Referring to Table 2-2 using class "B" mixture 40
kg. cement 1: Total length of the fence less the space occupied by
Multiply: the post footings (.60 x .60 m.)
Cement : . 218.4 x .525 = 114.66 . bags 95 m. - (.60 x 19 posts }
Sand 218.4 x .04375 = 9.55 cu. m. = 95 .- 11.40.
= 83.6 m.
C. Plastering of the fence to ground line only (2.00 m.)
Note:
1. Solve for the area The number of post is 19 pcs. only instead of 20 pieces
A = Ht. x Perimeter· because there are two posts at the gate entrance ~herein only
1

A = 2.00 x 91 m. one half of it's footing occupies the CHB footing.

A = 182 sq. m. one face
2. Referring to Table 2-3 using 40 kg. cement class "B"
Two faces: 182 x 2 = 364 sq. m.
mixture. 10 x 40 cm. Footing
2. Referring to Table 2-4 usirig class B mixture
Multiply:
Multiply: Cement 83 .6 x .30 = 25 bags
Cement : 364 x .192 = 69 .88 say 70 bags Sand 83.6 X .02 = 1.67 CU. m.
Sand 364 x .016 = : 5_.82 say 6 cu. m. Gravel 83.6 X .04 = 3.34 CU. m.·

D. Footing of Posts= .60 x .60 square

F. Concrete i:>ost -
1. Solve for the volume of the footing
1. Solve for the volume
V=txw x L
V =c .15 x .60 x .60 x 20 posts .20 x .20 x 2.40 x 20 posts
V = 1.08 cu. m. = 1.92 cu. m. ·

2. Referring to Table 1-2 class "B" mixture 2. From Table 1-2 using class '"B" mixture 40 kg .
Multiply: cement

42 43
 f

I SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

III
MASONRY

Multiply: !
I
Cement ; 1.92 x 7 .5 == 14.4 bags
Sand 1.92 x .50
I
.96 cu. m. l.00m. ---- --

l
Gravel ; 1.92 x 1.0 == 1.92 cu. m. !
0.50 m.

\wH 1.20m. ~l.20m

3.00 m.
0.10m. B A L1._ulLj . I
2.70 m.
2.10 m.
G. Plastering of the Post (if necessary) it I
Grn11nd Line
l!--ll,L____JL_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ IL---1-
0.60 m.
0.60m.
· 1. Solve foe the surface acea of the posf less the aceal 3.50 m. 6.00 m. Fu0ting Line
occupied by the CHS (.20 x 2.00) I
.60 x 2.00 m. ht. x 20 posts t FIGURE 2-5
== 24 sq. m.

Solution
),,- 2. Referring to Table 2-4 using class "B" mixture 40•
kg. cement
A. Concrete Hollow Blocks
Multiply: 1. Find the area of "A"
A == 6.00 x (2.70 + .50 + .60) == 22.8 sq. m.
Cement 24 x .192 == 4.6 bags
Sand 24.x .016 == .384 cu. m. 2. Find the are.a of "B"
B == 3.50 x (3.00 + .35 + .60) ==)3.825 sq. m.
Summary
Total Area - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 36 .625 sq. m.

Concrete Hollow Blocks __ - _ - - 2,730 pieces 3. Less Area of the windows

Cement __ - - - - 23 7 bags W c 1 == 2.tQ X 1.20 == 2.52 Sq. m.
Sand ______ 19.lOcu.m. W - 2 == .70 x 1.20 == .84 sq. m.
Gravel
6.34 cu. m.
Total Area of W-1 and W-2 == 3.360 sq. m.
ILLUSTRATION 2-3
Net Wall Area - - - - 33.265 sq. m.

From Figure 2-5 prepare the Bill of Materials using class 4 .. Referring to Table 2-2, multiply:
"B" concrete and class "C" mortar.
CHB: 33.265 x 12.5 == 415.8 say 416 pcs.
i 44
i 45

l~
 SIM~LIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE MASONRY

B. Cement Mortar that a CHS wall is cheaper .. than a reinforced concrete wall?
The consultant without hesitation replied,. I'm certain and
1. Referring to Table 2-2 using class "C" mixture •sure for it is already a proven fact sir." The poor client with a
40 kg. cement.
laymans view has to believe whatever his consultant says, the
Multiply - •. recommendation is approved, construct the fire wall with a 15
Cement: 33.265 x .759 = 25.24 bags cm. concrete hollow blocks.
Sand : 33.265 x .08438 = 2.81 cu. m.
Upon reaching home, the consultant felt so disturbed ha-.
C. Cement Plaster
ving assured his client of something that he has not proven for
1. Referring to Table 2-4 using class C Mixture: himself yet. He then sat down on his working table and made
the computation of the following problem.
Multiply:
Cement 33.265 x .144 = 4.79 bags ILLUSTRATION 2-4
Sand 33.265 X .016 = .53 CU. m.
A fire wall has a genaral dimensior: of 40 meters long
D. Footings
and 8 meters high specify the use of 15 cm. concrete ho I low
1. Total length of the wall = 9.50 m. blocks with class "B" concrete mortar mixture. Prepare a com-
parative bill of materials for both CHB and a reinforced for the
2. Referring to Table 2-3 for a (15 x 40) footing using same wall.
class "B" concrete
Mult.iply:
Cement
9.50 x .450 = 4.28 bags
Sand
9.50 X .030 = .28 CU. m.
Gravel
9.50 X .060 = .57 CU. m. ,1.--------40.00 m : - - - - - - - - - i

~
2-2 COMPARATIVE COST ANALYSIS BETWEEN A REIN-
OOm
FORCED CONCRETE WALL AND A CONCRETE HOL- Groun ·
LOW BLOCK WALL •.

L . .6om.
Footing Line
This is an ordinary question wherein some of the consul-
tants are confident enough when asked by a client "which is
cheaper to construct, a reinforced concrete wall or a concrete
hollow block wall? The usual common answer is "the concrete FIGURE 2-Sa
hollow block wall sir." The next question is "How sure are you

46
47
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
MASONRY

Solution Summary

A. For a 15 x 20 x 40 cm. CHB wall Concrete Hollow Block 15 cm. - - -- - - - - 4,000 pcs.
Cement - - - - - - - - 448 bags
1. Find the area of the wal I Sand ------- 37.2cu.m.
A = 40 x 8
·A = 320 sq. m.
B. Reinforced Concrete Wall
2. Referring to Table 2-2, multiply:
1. Solve for the volume of the wall
320 x 12.5 = 4,000 pcs.
V = .15 X 8.00 X 40.00 m.
V = 48 cu. m.

Cement Mortar 2. From Table 1-2 using class "B" concrete

1.
Referring to Table 2a2 using class "B" mixture Multiply:
40 kg. cement
Cement : 48 x 7 .5 = 360 bags
Multiply:
Sand : 48 X .5 = 24 cu. m.

Cement : 320 x 1.013 = 324.2 say 325 bags

Gravel : 48 X 1.0 = 48 cu. m.
Sand 320 x .08438 = 27 cu. m.
\

At this point of computation, the consultant stood up and

Cement Plaster prepared for a cup of coffee then return to his table and made
the following Tabulation:
1. Total area to be plastered

320 x 2 faces = 640 sq. m.

For Reinforced Concrete
For CHB Wall
Wall
2. Referring to Table 2-4 using class "B" mixture
40 kg. cement 15 cm. CHB 4,000 pcs. P___ Cement 360 bags P _ _
Cement "448 bags P___ Sand 24cu.m.P _ _
Multiply: 48 cu. m.P _ _
$and 38 cu .m. P_ _ _ Gravel
Total = P___ Total= p_ _
Cement: 640 x .192 = 123 bags
Sand : 640 x .016 = 10.2 cu. m.

48
49
 r
SIMPLIFIED CO~STRUCTION ESTIMATE I
MASONRY
Analysis

I. For reinforcement size and spacing, what is acceptabi

TABLE 2-5 QUANTITY OF CEMENT AND SAND PER 100 CHB
to CHS wall is more acceptable t~ a solid concrete. Th MORTAR
cost is even or the same.

CEMENT IN BAGS
2. For CHB wall, what is needed is_ lumber guide and scat-/ MXITURE
fo-ldong for the masons support in block laying. On the · CHB SIZE 40 kg. cement 50 kg. cement SAND
otherhand, the reinforced concrete wall requires forms, iri cm. I B C D B C 0
in cu.m.
frames and braces.
10 X 20 X 40 4.200 3.152 2.624 3.328 2.448 2.104 . 0.350
3. If forms are used on reinforced concrete works, what is 15 X 20 X 40 8.104 6.072 5.064 6.416 4.728 4.048 0.675-
needed is ¼ or ½ of the entire area of the walls. Pour- 20 X 20 X 40 12.000 9.000 7.504 9.504 7.000 6.000 1.000
ing of concrete could be done by sections.

4. If plywood form will be used,½ of the wall ar~a will re-

TABLE 2-6 QUANTITY OF CEMENT AND SAND F'ER 100
quire about 112 pieces plus the' frame and braces of CHB PLASTER *
about 2,500 bd. ft. and about 20 kg. assorted nails.
CEMENT IN BAGS
5. The dismantled plywood forms and lumber frames NO.OF FACE MI_XTURE
to be 40 kg. cement 50 kg. cement SAND
cou Id still be used on other structures, therefore, its A B C I A B C in cu. m.
Plastered
entire value could not be considered as part of the
cost of the concrete wall because · it also served on One Face 2.304 1.536 1.15211.856 1.216 o.896 I 0.128
other parts of the building. For depreciation of the Two Face 4.608 3.072 2.304 3.712 2.432 1.792 I 0.256
forms, 25% of its value could be considered in the
cost of the reinforced concrete wall. * Plaster thickness: 16 mm average.

6. Plastering of the reinforced concrete wall is minimal

Table 2-5 and 2-6 was presented. to simplify further the es-
considering the fine finished surface of the concrete ·
wall when plywood form is used. timating procedure in determining the quantity of the cement
and s~nd required for CHB laying and plastering work. In this
7, In terms of strength and durability,. reinforced con- ' table, the cement and sand for mortar and plastering is -deter-
crete ,is preferred than the CHB. mir:ied per hundred pieces of CHB not by the square area me,-
thod as previously presented.
8. Make canvass of the prices of the materials listed 'plus
ILL'-"STRATION 2-5
your _g,ood analysis, your choice and conclusion might
as well agree or disagree with that of the consultant. From Figure 2-6 prepare the bill of materials using class
50 "C" mixture.

·- 51
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE MASONRY

-· • - 60.00 m. - ·-· •/
2-3 SPECIAL TYPE OF CONCRETE HOLLOW BLOCKS

CHS Wal/
Cement Piaster
l.
0
E
· The common and ordinary type of concrete hollow blocks
are those with three hollow cells as explained in Section 2-1.
However, there are concrete hollow blocks w,hich are spe~ially
0
<>i designed for architectural and structural purposes manufac-
tured by Jackbilt,Concrete Products as presented in Figure 2-7.

; :
--- .. -.,..
Ground Line

Footing Line
.l For our estimating aid Table 2°7 was prepared to simplify the
preparation of the materials required for block laying such as
the quantity of cement, sand and gravel.
Solution

A_ Concrete Hpllow Blocks The idea in manufacturing the, concrete hollow blocks
with two eel Is is to fil I the hollow c_ore with concrete not just
I. Determine the area of the fence _by a mortar for reasons of strength and economy. This is how
the special type of CHS differs from that of the ordinary CHS.
2_00 x 60 m. = 120 sq. m.
The required quantity of gravel to fill the core was already in-
2. Referring to Table 2-2. corporated in Table 2-7.
Multiply:
CHS: 120 x 12.5. = 1,500 pcs. TABLE 2-7 QUANTITY OF CEMENT, SAND AND GRAVEL PER
ONE HUNDRED BLOCKS
8. Cement Mortar MORTAR BLOCK LAYING: AND CONCRETE FILLER OF CORE:

CEMENT IN BAGS
1. Divide 1,500 by 100 = 15 JACKBILT
size
Mixture 40 kg.
"1,1SktT
Mixture 50 kg. SAND GRAVEL
jr, ill
in cm. B C D A B C cu.m. cu.m.
2. From Table 2-5 Two Core
Stretcher Block 2.890 2.167 1.806 5.334 4.445 3.556 .537 .593
Multiply:
Single End
40 kg. Cement: 15 x 6.072 = 91 bags Block 2.000 1.500 1.250 5.334 4.445 3.556 .463 .593
Beam Block I .111 :833 .695 6.669 5.558 4.446 .463 , .741
Sand : 15 x 0.675 = 10.125 cu. m.
Half Block .542 .406 .338 2.890 2.408 1.927 .20!, .321
C. Cement Plaster (One Face) Beam Block .820 .615 .512 4.104 3.420 2.736 .296 .456
• L-Corner Block .925 .694 .578 4.104 3.42Q 2.736 .305 .456
1. From Table 2-6 Half Block .399 .. 299 .249 1.782 1.485 1.188 .132 .198
Multiply: Half Bl1>ck 1.146 .860 .716 . . .096 . I

40kg.Cement:15 x.1.152 =17.3sayl8l;>ags

Sand : 15 x 0.128 = 1.92 say 2 cu. m.

52
53
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE MASONRY

~w ",r
2-4 ADOBE STONE
~ c.<"· ~ l s er,,

~
2C ore Stretch

""' ..,~c. <('·

~/§er,,_ A.dobe Stone is ordi_narily used as fencing materials as subs-
titute to the concrete hollow blocks for economic reasons. Late-
I,,, v~~-
19cm
ly, the used of adobe stone was no longer.limited to the ordina-
,...... ry zotalo and fencing work but also extensively used as finish-
ing and decorative purposes for the exterior an_d interior of
building structures.
. <"1
I c,."
/'1. ;.,:,:

~@✓(I,,. c-,,_v
j'l,;r "'V <""
'1,.<:,c; 2 Core
L Corner Block

~19cm

c,.<o~:...,?i~~-15m.
••,.,;:<•.- ·. :,,iif , ., .30 ~- .;•l~,-·
.'/?'"!-·,"•\" • ·,j!~

.Core
d.£;.:.:,...t.~ ·1--,·:,t~~~
1,~~:--7.~~'.{~:<S'- ~,.,.,.,.. ,. . ,;>l§,;1, ~t·. )//~)?"
. ,-:1· ..... · ·-··":f*:;;~•·
mgle End Block
'f~_
f/-_.-_ ,,..,~f';/Jj/!/,' ·" m.11\f,J/IS!<-•fi'
,.-€r ~1¥'./s:,';«-
,'5 m -,(,:<fl"" ..
:s «-·
ls c,

Buttress

FIGURE 2-8

The use of adobe _stone for buttresses, cross footings, fen-

Single End Block
ces and stairs minimizes the use of mortar filler as that of the
concrete hollow block cells. Plastering is sometimes disregarded
FIGURE 2-7 to avail ofthe natural texture of the stone.

54 55
 MASONRY
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

1 5.00
TABLE 2-8 QUANTITY OF CEMENT AND SAND FOR ADOBE MORTAR 5.00 5.00
PER SQ. M. (Average Thickness: 20 mm)

CEMENT IN BAGS
NUMBER SIZE MIXTURE CLASS
per sq. m. i'l cm. SAND
40,kg. 50 kg. i11 cu. m. .. 15
D
_,
B C D B C .15
1.50

12 15 X 15 X 45 .2808 .2106 .1756 .2220 .1638 .1404 .0234

Buttress Ground Line
JO 15 X 20 X 45 .2520 .1890 .1575 .1995 .1470 .1260 .0210
.so
11 15 X 30 X 30 .2280 .1708 .1423 .1803 .1328, .1139 .0190
8 J5 X 30 X 40 .2079 .1559 .1299 .1646 .1213 .I 040 .0173
6.5 15 X 30 X 45 .1901 .1426 .I 188 . I 505 .I 109 .0951 .0158
FIGURE 2-8a

ILLUSTRATION 2-6
TABLE 2-9 QUANTITY OF STONE, CEMENT AND SAND From Figure 2c8a compute the quantity of adobe stone,
FOR BUTTRESSES AND FOOTINGS
cement and sand using class "C" mixture.
BUTTRESS AND FOOTING CEMENT MORTAR PER STONE
CEMENT IN BAGS
Cross Sect. Number of Solution
of Buttress Stone 40 kg. 50 kg.
SAND
in cm, Course Per m. in cu.m.
Ht. B C D B C D A. Adobe Stone Fence
1. . Determine the net length of the fence minus the
30 X 45 2 12 .027 .0203 .017 .0214 .016 .014 .00225
45 X 45 3 18 .029 .0220 .018· .0230 .017 .015 .00244
space occupied by the buttresses
45 X 60 4 24 .027 .0203 .017 .0214 .016 .014 .00225
45 X 75 5 30 .032. .0240 .020 .0250 .018 .016 .00263 15.00 m. - (.30 x 3 post) = 14.1 m.
45 X 95 6 36 .034 .0253 .021 .0270 .020 .017 .00281

2. Solve for the net area

TABLE;: 2-10 QUANTITY OF CEMENT AND SAND FOR
PLASTERING PER SQUARE METER
~4.l0m. x 2.00m.ht. = 28.20sq.m.

SIDE CEMENT ,~AND

40 kg. l_ m.cu.m .. 3. Referring to Table 2-8 using 15 ·x 1_5 x 45 cm. stone
50 kg.
B C D •B C D
One Face .300 .225 .188 .238 .175 .150 .025 Multiply:
Two Faces .600 .450 .375 .476 .350 .300 .02:5 28.20 x 12 = 338.4 say 339 pcs.
57

56
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
MASONRY

4. Total height of the four posts

3. Fence Footing= 82 pcs.
2.00 m. x 4 post = 8.00 m. Referring to Table 2-9
Multiply:
Cement: 82 x .02030 = 1.665 bags·
5. From Table 2-9 using 30 x 45 Buttress Sand : 82 x .00225 = .1845 cu. m.
Multiply:
8.00 m. x 12 pcs. per m. height = 96 pcs. C. Cement Plaster: One Face

Plus the adobe stone footing per buttress or post 1. Determine the total surface area of the wall plus
the surface area of_ the buttress to be plastered.
96 + (4 pcs. x 4 posts) = 112 pcs.
t15.00m.+ .45+ (.15 x8)
= 16.65 m.
6. Determine the length of the_ fence less the area occu-
pied by the_ buttress footing 2. Solve for the area
15.00 m.- (.45 x 3) = 13,65 m.
length x height
~
" = 16.65 m. x 1.50 m.
Multiply by 6 stone per meter length
= 24.975 sq. m.
13.65 m. x 6 = 81.9 say 82 pcs.
From Table 2-10, multiply
B. Cement Mortar Cement: 24.975 x .225 = 5.619 bags
Sand : 24,975 x .025 = .624 cu. m.
I. Wall fence area= 28.20 sq. m.
Referring to Table 2-8 usi·ng class "C" mixture 40 3. Multiply the result by two if two sides are to be
kg. cement plastered.
Multiply:
Cement: 28.20 x '.2106 = 5.939 bags
Cement; 5.619 x 2 = 11.238 bags
Sand : 28.20 x .0234 = .6599 cu. m.
Sand : .624 x 2 = 1.248 cu. m.

2. Buttress (post) and Footing - 112 pcs.

Referring to Table 2-9 class "C" mixture 40 kg. SUMMARY
cement
Multiply:
Adobe Stone - - - - - - - - - - - - - 533 pcs.
Cement: 112 x .020,30 = 2.274 bag_s
Cement 21.12 say 22 bags
Sand : 112 x .00225 = .252 cu. m.
Sand 2.35 cu. m.
58
59 .
 /

MASONRY
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

2-5 DECORATIVE CONCRETE BLO~KS

Decorative blocks are made out from either cement mor- @Q)
tar or clay. These construction materials had been widely used
ITALIAN
for ventilation and decorative purposes. Although there are .un- 55 mm x 215 x 125 mm
limited number of types and design available in the market,
only few were presented to serve as a visual aid in this study
of estimates.
©©(Q)·
Table 2-11 shows the number of blocks per square meter
including the cement and sand for mortar per 100 blocks.

TABLE 2-11 QUANTITY OF DECORATIVE BLOCKS, CEMENT

0
BOLIVIAN
©©@
100 x 180 x 180 mm.
AND SAND FOR BLOCK LAYING MORTAR
SIZE
NUMBER 40 kg. CEMENT per 100 BLOCKS SAND
Q
0
i'1 cm. MIXTURE CLASS
per sq. m. per

~
t X h X I A B 100 blk .

6x12x19 38.5 .346 .230 .0192

l0x14x19 33.3 .612 .408 .0340
100 x 140 x 240 mm.
10 X. 14 X 23 27.8 .684 .456 .0380 LUZ
10 X 24 X 24 16.0 .882 .588 .0490
Q_Q,l:) qo[) ~o,p
10 X 14 X 39 16.7 .972 .648 .0540 ~oq DO<I

~g~
~O<il
nt:I at:! t1c/b
10 X 19 X 39 12.5 1.062 .708 .0590
Q,v'lJ. c:;olJ
co.a coo §\0~1
TABLE 2-12 QUANTITY OF CEMENT AND SAND FOR VARIOUS
TYPES OF BRICKS AND STONE PER ONE HUNDRED BLOCKS Bou dot:l [1c:,'tl cte:-,'ti
100 x 250 x 250 mm.
SIZE PIECES 40 kg. CEMENT MORTAR (20 mm thick) SAND CORINTHIAN
ill CU. m.

'
~~~1~◊~
i11 cm. per sg. m. MIXTURE

~
A B

5 X 10 200 .180 .120 .010

5 X 15 133 .270 .180 .015 w~JR◊~
5 X 20 100 .360 .240 .020 ~~
5 X 25 80 .450 .300 , .025 · 100 x 230 x 250 mm.
ROMAN
10 X 20 50 .720 .480 .040
10 X 25 40 .900 .600 .050
10 X ·30 33 1.080 .720 .060
61
60
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

chapter 3
~~~
,~1
JOSEPHINE
~~~
l~l~~ml
100 x 250 x 250 mm.
METAL REINFORCEMENT
3-1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
~Q~ ~oO. ~•q,
@~ eo1~ ~◊~ ~~~
Of'i·
D,
VtlG! i§l"~
G>.s~
~v~ ~Vt!
Steel is the most widely used reinforcing material for
almost all types of concrete construction. It is an excellent part-
b;')~
A~ f?g~ ~~ ner of concrete in resisting both tension and compression stres-
ASG ses. Comparatively, steel is ten times stronger than concrete in
100 x 250 x 250 mm.
resisting compression load and hundred times stronger in tensile
QQL:] Q,.VLJ 0.9.£1 [J.Q,.Q
stresses .
a.:.~ C7o'u CTo~
C76"CJ uv...o C!,.9..cJ 0.'9...0 The design of concrete assumes that concrete.and steel re-
r.:7o'C C7.D'C C7C.'C
0..QL] inforcement act together in resisting load and likewjse to be in
no..o C.Q..O r::::l,.Q.CJ
C76L] C7.0"'u O',:,,,'O C7A"w the state of simultaneous deformation, otherwise, the steel bars
Q.O::,.,c C..9JO c.o.a
C7..::.'Cl O'A,;:J C7A'0 might slip from the concrete in the absence of sufficient bond
AUM due to excessive load.
100 x 250 x 250 mm.
In order to provide a high degree of sufficient bond bet-
fool~ C¾] ween the two materials, steel reinforcing bars with a surface de-
formation in various design were introduced.
~rS"ZJ~~
cw
~.

foolr7A.'1 ~
EGYPTIAN
l@J·~YiJ fS't2'.J
100 x 250 x 250 mm.
. ~/1'
.

~ (]
□
PERSIAN
•
coo oc:ro oo:a·
DA<J DA() D,....<J.
ouo owe auo
D(JO
D<J
oOc
QO CQD
GD<J
Cc cC.cr
Im~
I&~
~

Types of Deformed Bars

100 x 250 x 250 mm. FIGURE 3-1
62
63
 METAL REINFORCEMENT

SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

3-2 IDENTIFICATION OF STEEL BARS

TABLE 3-1 STANDARD WEIGHT OF PLAIN OR
DEFORMED ROUND STEEL BARS Steel reinforcing bars are provided with distinctive
markings which identify the name of the manufacturer with it's
(in kgsl
10.5 m 12.0 rn 13.5 m
initial and the' bar size number including the type of steel bai-s
SIZE 5.0 m 6.0 m 7.5 m 9.-0m
8mmq) 1.98 2.37 2.96 3.56 4.15 4.74 5.33
such as:
10mmq) 3.08 3.70 4.62 5.54 6.47 7.39 8.32
7 .99 9.32 10.66 11.99
12 m,n~ 4.44 5.33 6.66 N = For Billet
13 mm¢ 5.21 6.25 7.83 9.38 10.94 12.50 14.07
16mm¢ 7.90 9.47 11.84 14.21 16.58 18.95 21.32 A .= For Axle
20 mm¢ 12.33 14.80 18.50 22.19 25.89 29.59 33.29 Rail Sign = For Rail Steel
25mm¢ 19.27 23.12 28.90 34.68 40.46 46.24 52.02
28mm.¢ 24.17 29.00 36.25 43.50 50.75 58.00 65.25

3Qmm</l
32mm¢
27.75
31.57
33.29
37.88
41.62
47.35
49.94
· 56.82
58.26
66.29
66.59
75.76
74.91
85.23 \I/lain R ibS
Main Ribs ~,l~
f
36mm¢ 39.96 47.95 59.93 71.92 83.91 / 95.89 107.88
'[-.:.=-
1\ M
1n·1tial of

DEFORMATION REQUIREMENTS
Nominal
Diameter

8
Max. Average
Spacing of Lugs

7.0
Height
Minimum

0.3
Tolerance
Maximum

0.6
Max. Value
Summation of Gaps
of lugs
5.5
1~1 Bar Size
Bar Size

10 7.0 0.4 0.8 ,7.8 i\r:=~\ _ Steel Type Grade Mark

12
13
8.4
9.1
0.5
0.6
l.O
1.2
9.4
10.2
\\l_'~- Grade 40
:r- Grade 50
16 11.2 0.7 1.4 12.6
20 14.0 1.0 2.0 15.7
25 17.5 1.2 -- 2.4 19.6 Marking System
28 19.6' 1.4 2.8 22.0
30 21.0 1.5 3.0 23.6
FIGURE 3-2
32 22.4 1.6 3.2 25.1
36 24.5 1.8 3.6 27.5
3-3 BAR SPLICE, HOOK AND BEND
MECHANICAL PROPERTIES In estimating the quantity of the steel reinforcing bars,
Yield Tensile Elongatiol"I Bending Diam~ter
Strength Strength in200 mm, Angle, of Pin one has to consider the additional length for the hook, the bend
Class Grade MPa, MPa, Specimen percent, Degree (d =- nominal
min. min. min, diameter of
specimen)
and the splice whose length varies depending upon the limita-

Hot Rolled
230 230 390 D <2smm . 18 180 3d tion as provided for by the National Building Code.
D ~25mm 16 4d
Non-Weldable
Deformt?d Steel 275 275 480 o <2smm 10 180 4d
Ba, D >2s mm 8 5d Minimum Splice Length
415 415 620 0<2smm
o:>2smm
8
7
180 5d
6d
Types of Reinforcement
180 3d
Hot-Rolled
Wt!-ldabfe
230 230 3SO 0<2smm
0>2smm
20
18 4d = 25 x Bar Size + 150 mm.
Deformed or 275 275 480 D <2s mm 16 ,so 4d 1. Tension Bars
Plain Steer 0>25mm 14 5d "" 20 x Bar Size + 150 mm.
8c1r 415 415 550 D<25mm 14 ,so 5d 2. Compression Bars
. , 0>2smm 12 6d

65

64
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE METAL REINFORCEMENT
'I'

Illustration 3-1

Determine the length of the splice for a 16 mm. tensile

reinforcement of a beam.
&: A

L = 2A + 3B + 22~
fu I ----==--~·
C ~~
L=A+C
/ B

l
Solution

1. Classification of the reinforcement is under tension

2. Multiply:
I?
25 x 16 mm + 150 mm. == 550 mm.

--~~-1./_". ··---_-I
A

h = 911
~ -~ 4!21'
. ] .. ·, 4¢
L = 2 (A + B) + 20 ~
A
TotalL=A+B+C

~ i I t" n= \ ~ 2_;'-+.=====:::::J
__

~~~~£~,
T ){3~,
L
HOOK
'1 t-----L------i

BEND
Hook Length = L + h for hook I
Mild Steel Minimum Hook and Bend Allowance 7
A Total Length ;, A + B + C + D B -____,..,

L=A+B-½r-J!

h = 11¢ 4~
1>
B
n = s.s~ I l h¢ L-4--.
~
r>-J
I

,______ L-------,
HOOK'
_:j
--(

Hook lenght
_j_

O
L + n for bend
~
3p

BEND
L-___,
l ~ B

~
y

High· Yield Bars Minimum Hook and Bend Allowance L = A + 2B + C + D • 2r. 4~

FIGURE 3-3 FIGURE. 3-4

66 67
 METAL REINFORCi:EMENT
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

A
~r The size of the steel reinforcement and its quantity is one
A
Total Length= A item of .the construction which is quite difficult and complica-
Total Length= A+ h
ted to determine. Difficult in the sense·that it requires patience
and deeper analysis in computing the actual number of bars re-

][
/
B
I (:g; A ~
quired to be used in every part of the structures. Estimating is
done ·in a systematic approach, that is by computing the quanti-
ty of each member one at a time, item by item then summa-
I I
Total L =A+ B • ½ r · Y, Total L =A+ 2h
rized the results according to its size and quantity in conformity
with the commercial length of steel bars to avoid excesses and
unnecessary cutting. Ordering materials that is more than what
is actually needed in the co_nstruction will only invite pilferages

@ A
Total L =A+ h
~·
! ·.
I
A

Total L = A + 2h
'JB and encourage wreck less cutting which is in effect contributory
to the construction waste.

Estimating the quantity of the steel reinforcement, refers

~,. / ;___
-B
·;JU~~
. . f-c~
'l
A

Total L = A + B + C
·1
to the commerc-ial length of steel bars to be ordered as a sum-
mary of all the cut bars intended for the differ'ent,member of
the structures. Under such condition the following problems has
to be anticir1ated.

1. For main reinforcement of post, columns, beams, gir-

Total L =A+ B + C • r. 2,i/
ders and the like, .is determined by the "Direct Count-
ing Method" wherein the additional length for hook,
bend or lapping-joints are often overlooked.
A

2. For other structural member such as lateral ties, stir-

rups, spirals, dowels, cut bars and the like should be

,,~~ D
trea1ed separately and carefully determine the length
of their cuts including the allowances for hook and
•.I -- ....I•
bend.

3. After knowing the length of the lateral ties, stirrups,

etc. the next problem is how to select the steel bars
'
to be ordered from the various commercial· length of
FIGURE 3-5

69
68
 /;!. D/1 I
1 _-
t _. ,:1 [ '' ';' 1",.' ~·
METAL REINFORCEMENT
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTIOI\I ESTIMATE

1. By the Direct Counting Method

5.00 meters to 13.50 meters avoiding extra cuts which
. 2. By the Unit CHB Method
might be classified as junk unless they could be of ser-
3. By the Area Method
vice or used on other structural members.
The Direct Counting Method could -be done by counting
4. Tie wire for reinforcement joints is a big item of a directly the number of vertical and horizontal bars plus the
large construction work considering its cost. The cut- lapping, hook and bend from a detailed plan. But, how many
ting length of each tie wire shou-ld be to the minimum plans have presented a detailed drawing for steel reinforce-
required based from the diameter of the bars to be tied. ment?

The Area and Unit CHB Method - This is the simplest me-
TABLE 3-3 AREAS OF GROUPS OF REINFORCING BARS
thod of computing the steel reinforcement for CHB with the
NUMBER OF BARS (mm) 2 aid of Table 3-4 wherein the values _presented includ~s the allo-
BAR diam.
(mm) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 wances for splice and bend.
628 ·57 85 113 141 170 198 226 254 283
850 101 151 201 251 302 352 402 452 503
10 79 157 236 314 393 471 550 628 707 785
12 113 226 339 452 565 679 792 905 1017 1131 TABLE 3-4 LENGTH OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT FOR
CONCRETE HOLLOW BLOCK WORK
16 201 402 603 804 1005 1206 1407 1608 1809 2011
VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT HORIZONTAL REINFORCEMENT
20- 314 628 942 1257 1571 1885 2199 2513 2827 3142
25 491 982 1473 1963 2454 2945 3436 3927 4418 4909 Spacing Length of Bars- in Meter Spacing Length of Bars in meter
32 804 1608 2412 3216 4021 4825 5629 6433 7237 8042 in Per - Per in Per Per
Block Sq.M. Layers Block Sq.M.
40 1256 2513 3769 5026 6283 7539 8796 1005 1131 1257 cm.

0.235 2.93 2 0.264 3.30

.40
.60 0.171 2.13 3 0.172 :us
3-4 CONCRETE HOLLOW BLOCKS REINFORCEMENT .80 0.128 1.60 4 0.138 1.72

In our previous discussions of Masonry in Chapter 2, the

concrete hollow block work had been thoroughly discussed
giving emphasis on how to determine the quantity of the
Illustration 3-2
blocks, cement, sand and gravel except the steel reinforcement
which is ne~essary to- complete the work. The size and spacing
From Figure 3-6 determine the_ number of 10 cm. CHB,
of the CHB reinforcement depends upon the plan and s·pecifi-
and the vertkal · reinforcing bars spaced at 80 cm. on center
catitms which is the basis_ of the estimate. The number of steel
including the horizontal bars at every after three layers.
bars required ·could be determined in three ways:

71
70
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
METAL REINFORCEMENT

- -..... vPn Re1nf.@ 0.80 rn. o c

I I ' I I~ 11. 1·· I .

.. L Horizont.::i/
4. Order: 8 pcs. 10 mm x 5.00 m. Steel bars
1 - 10 mm x 6.00 m. Steel bars
Reinf.@ ~very
.. ......_ E 1 3 ~ayers

2nd Solution

Natural Ground 1. Solve for the area of the fence

Footing
4.00 m. A = 4 x 3.00
FIGURE 3-6 A = 12 sq.m.

2. Determine the number of CHB

1st Solution

12 x 12.5 = 150 pcs.

1. Solve for the area of the fence
A = length x height 3. Referring to Table 3-4
A = 4.00 X 3.00
A = 12 sq. m. a) Vertical Reinforcement per Block
@ .80 m. o.c.

2. Vertical reinforcement at 80 cm. o.c.

Referring to Table 3-4 by the square meter or area Multiply:
method.
Multiply: 150 x Q.128 = 19.2 meters
Select: 4 pcs 10 mm x 5.00 m. long
12 x 1.60 = 19.2 meters

Convert this val~e to the commercial length of st~el bars b) H9rizontal bars for every after 3 layers
ranging from 5.00 to 13.50 meters. Select the most economical Referring to Table 3-4, multiply
length avoiding extra cut.
150 X 0.172. = 25.8 m.
Select: 4 pcs. 10 mm. x 5.00 m. long
c) Convert to commerdal length
3. Horizontal bars at every after 3 layers Select:
From Table 3-4, multiply: 4. pcs. 10 mm x 5.00 and 1 @ 6.00 m, long
12 x 2.15 = 25.80 meters.
4. Order: 8 pcs 10 mm x 5.00 m. and
Select: 4 pcs@ 5.00 m. and 1 - @ 6.00 m. long
1 - 10 mm x 6.00 m. Steel bars

72
73
 METAL REINFORCEMENT
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

3-5 TIE WIRE FOR STEEL REINFORCEMENT Illustration 3-3

Gauge number 16 galvanized wire is commonly used as tie Continuing the solution of illustration 3-1 from the follow-
wire for steel bar intersections and splicing joints. The length of ing d,ata obtained.
each tie wire depends upon the size of the bars to be tied on.
Tie wire is one item of the construction which is always inclu- Vertical Reinforcement spacing= 80 cm.
ded in the bill of materials without the support of computa- Horizontal Reinforcement spacing every 3 layers
tions, its quantity is mostly determined by the estimator Area of the wall == 12 sq. m.
through .mere calculations which is somewhat alright for a small
work but not for a large construction involving multiple floors. Solution
The imaginary estimate for tie wire will never give a satisfac-
tory resu It. ,1. Oeterm)ne the number of CHB
12 x 12..5 = 150 pcs.
CHB Reinforcement Tie Wire - The common size of steel
reinforcement for concrete hollow blocks are either 10 mm, 12 2. Using a 25 cm. tie wire from Table 3-5
mm or 13 mm depending upon the plan and specifications. For
Multiply:
those particular size of reinforcement, a 25 cm.' or 30 cm. long Tie Wire: 150 x .0016 = .24 kilos
tie wire folded at the center will be satisfactory.

3-6 INDEPENDENT FOOTING REINFORCEMENT

In estimating for the reinforcement of an independent

TABLE 3-5 KILOGRAM OF NO. 16 TIE WIRE OF CONCRETE
HOLLOW BLOCKS REINFORCEMENT or isolated_ footing, the following rules has to be observed:
VERTICAL
SPACING
HORIZONTAL
SPACING
I -KILOGRAM PER 100 BLOCKS
1. Know the actual dimension of the footing as to its length
25 cm. ties 30 cm. ties
in cm. in layer and width.
40 2 .0042 .005.1
40 3 .0031 .0038 2. Remember that the minimum underground protective
40 4 .0028 .00.33 covering of concrete td the ste~l reinforcement is 7.5 cm.
60 2 .0028 .0034
60 3 .0021 .0025 3. If the p!an does not call for a hook or bend of the footing
60 4 .0018 .0022 reinforcement, the length of the bar is equai to the length
80 2 .0021 .0025
80,;. or width of the footing minus the protective covering at
3 .0016 .0019
80 4 .0014 .0017 both ends.

75

74
 METAL REINFORCEMENT
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION EST.IMATE

Solution
4. l.f the plan calls for a hook or bend of the reinforcement
the bar-cut should include the allowance for hook and
bend as presented in Figure 3-4 and 3-5. 1. The net length of one bar is,
1.50 -- (.075 + .075) = 1.35 m.
5. Know the spacing distance of the steel bars both ways
2. Find the total number of cut bars in one footing by
to determine the exact number r~quired, then as much as
Direct Counting
possible select the appropriate steel bar length which is di-
visible by the cut length avoiding unwanted extra cuts. 13 x 2 = 26 pcs.
Various problems in computing for the steel reinforcement
3. Get the total number of bars for the 6 footings
will be encountered as measurement and design varies. Problems
are usually met on reinforcing member which requires cutting 26 x 6 = 156 pcs.@ 1.35 m. long
and bending. Others could be determined by the Direct Count-
ing Method.
4. Select the steel bars whose length is-economically cut
into, 1.35 m. long

Illustration 3-4 6.00m ..

'1.35 = 4.44 pcs.
The fractional value of .44 is inevitable but should not
From Figure 3-7, determine the .number of 12 mm steel
be included in· the computation because it is less than one
bars required if tber-e-are 6 footing with a general dimension of
1.50 X 1.50 meters. ·cut bar length, use the whole value of 4.0

5. Divide the result· of step 3 by 4.0

T lr"· ....... 11
I
I
1.50m
156 I
--
4,.0
= 39 pcs. of 12 mm x 6.00 m.

The common error committed in estimating the number of

--1 i-- 1.35 m. . IL
I .075 m.
I

.075 m. , steel bars is presented below;

i 12 mm steel bars Using th-e-same data
I
i
1. The net length of one bar is 1.35 m.
j• 1.50 m. • j
2. The total number of bars in one footing is
FIGURE 3-7 · 13 x 2 = 26 pcs.

76 77
 ~IMPLIFIEO CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE METAL REINFORCEMENT

3. Total number of bars for 6 footings

12 mm. steel bars
26 x 6 = 156 pcs.

4. The total length of the bars in meter

1.15 m.
156 X 1.35 == 210.6 m.
C :::>
5. Converting this to steel bar length L=l.20m.

210.6
= 35 pcs. steel bars
~1.15m.
6.00

Analysis: FIGURE ~-8

Comparing the result of the two estimating procedures, the

answers has a difference of 4 pieces steel bars at 6.00 meters Solution
long. This is the result by including the fractional amount of
.44 as divisor of the reinforcing bar. length. 1. Determine-the net length of one reinforcing cut-bar
1.00 m. + .20 m. = 1.20 m.
The second procedure could be correct if the quotient in
dividing the length of one bar by the length of one cut bar 2. Total cut-bars in one footing
yi.elds a whole value, on the contrary, if the resu It has a fractio- 6 x 2 , = 12 pcs.
nal amount, the second procedure will not give a correct
answer. 3. Total cut-bars for 20 footings
12 x 20 = 240 pcs.
The following illustration is an example where the second
procedure applies. 4. Total length of all the bars
240 x 1.20 = 2&8 meters
Illustration 3-5
5. Divide the above result by the length of one steel bar
say 6.00 meters.
Fr.om Figure 3-8, determine the number of 12 mm steel
2.88
bars and the tie wire in kilogram if there are 20 pcs. indepen- 48 pcs.
6.00
denf square footing with a. general dimenston of 1.15 x 1.15
meters.
\ . Order: 48 pcs. of 12 mm x 6.00 m. steel bars

78
79
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE METAL REINFORCEMENT-

Solving the same problem by the 1st procedure:

4. If the result is a fractional value, adopt the first pro-
1. Net length of on.e reinforcing bar = 1.20 m. cedure.

2. Total bars in one footing Considering illustration 3-5, Tie Wire could be determined
under the following steps:
6 x 2 = 12 pcs.
3. Total for 20 footings 1. Find the number of bar intersections in one footing
6 x 6 = 36 ties
12 x 20 = 240 pcs.
4. Divide one steel bar by the length of one cut bar 2. Total Ties for 20 footings
20 x 36 = 720 ties
-6.00
5 pcs. 3. Using 25 cm. length per tie
1.20
Multiply:
This simply means that 5 pcs. at ·1.20 meter long reih-
720 x .25 m. = 180 meters
forcing bar cou Id be taken from a 6.00 meters long steel
bar, then1 4. One kilo of No. 16 G.I. wire is approximately 53 me-·
ters long
5. qivide the total cut bars for 20 footings by 5 Divide:
240 180 = 3.4 kilos
= 48 pieces
5 53

The question now is when to use ~he first procedure and 3-7 POST AND COLUMN REINFORCEMENT
when to adopt the second procedure. In determining alone what
procedure to adopt is an additional burden, to avoid such con- The reinforcement of posts and columns to be co.nsidered
fusion, the following rules will help in making the right choice. in the estimates are: '

1. Determine the net length of one reinforcing bar 1. The Main or Vertical Reinforcement
2. The Lateral Ties or
2. Divide 6.00 m. or any commercial length steel bar .by 3. The Spiral Ties for Circular Column
the reiu It of step 1
The quantity and length of the main reinforcement is de- .
3. If the result is a whole number (exact value) use the termined by the "Direct Counting Method" giving special atten- i
second procedure
tion to the additional length fore ••.·J.I
80
. '
I
j
 ,SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE METAL REINFORCEMENT

1. Lap-Joints of end splices 2. Verify the position of the reinforcement spll.\:ing if it is ad-
2. Allowance for bending and hook justed to the commercial length of steel bars. "The lesser
3. Aaditional length for the beam depth and floor thick- the splice the lesser the expense."
ness if the height of .the building plan indicates from
floor to floor. 3. Identify the bars with bend and hook, for adjustment of
their length in ordering the steel bars .

! I I
I
.[
I
Floor Slab
I
t Beam
- Beam ,...
I
Add. Le ngth /-Beam
- .-
I lo·

t -'- ........
1-t-Column--i--

Lap J oint ~ Column

-'- ....~

-- .....

1d
L-L-

1.
.
~

~
I;
c_enter to center
pl l_,_ _ _ _ _ _- . i
center to outer side
-

FIGURE 3-9 - Beam

- - Beam ,...

•- Column -t>
3-8 BEAMS AND GIRDERS REINFORCEMENT
- 1-
..I
-,
The "Direct Counting Method" is the best method in de- outer to outer side
inside to inside
termining the main reinforcement for beams and girders. Provi-
ded that in the selection of_ the length of'steel bars, the follow- Span of the Beam
ing physical condition of the beam in relation with its support
shou Id be considered .
FIGURE 3-10
. 1. Verify from the plan if the span of the column where the
beam is to rest measures from center to center, outer to
· 3-9 LATERAL TIES
center or outer to outer side of the column. This has to
be considered in determining the length of steel bars to be
Tied column has reinforcement consisting of vertical bars
ord.ereu.
held in a position by lateral reinforcement called lateral ties.

l 82 83
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
METAL REINFORCEMENT

The ACI Code so provides:

2. _Diameter of the lateral ties = 10 mm.
"A /I non-prestressed bars for tied column shall be en-
closed by lateral ties of at least No. 3 in size for longitudinal 3. Multiply:
bars No. 10 or smaller and at least No. 4 in size for No. 11 to
IS and bundled longitudinal bars." 16 x 20 = 320 mm.
48 x 10 = 480 mm.
The spacing of the ties shall not exceed:
Short~st side of the column = 300 mm.
1. 16 x the longitudinal bar diameter
2. 48 x lateral tie bar diameter or 4. Adopt 300 mm. or 30 cm. spacing
3. The least dimension of the column
Illustration 3-7
Illustration 3-6
A building has a series of 26 square columns having a cross-
Determine the spacing of the lateral tie for a tied column
sectional dimension of 30 x 30 cm. with 8 pieces 20 mm. ver-
as shown in Figure 3-11.
tical reinforcing bars for each column. Make an order of 10 mm
steel bars required for making the lateral ties. ·
~
-
I 0mm

'I
I
Lateral Ties
10mm
~

I'_J 20mm.
I
1
.30 m.
1
I

I ..
Col. Reinforcement I

.30m ·,
Col. Reinf. I II.. II '

30 cm.
r.30m-~ ~
10mm.
. ,. I! '
I
.3om. I lln ~1-1-2omm.

'·
Lateral Ties

-- T l_.._____-1---...:.1
- ·, .30m .

FIGURE 3~11 I
,-. ..1-
Solution

1. Diameter of the main long,itudinal bar= 20 mm.

FIGURE 3-12
I 84

l
85

J
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE METAL REINFORCEMENT

Solution
1. Determine the spacing of the lateral ties. 8. Divide the result of 5 by result of 7

624
16 x 20 mm. = 320 mm. or 32 cm. = 124.8 say 125 pcs.
5
48 x 10 mm. = 480 mm. or 48 cm.
The shortest side of the column is = 30 cm. 9. Order: 125 pcs. of 10 mm. x 6.00 m. steel bars

2. Adopt the 30 crn. spacing

Illustration 3-8
3. Determine the number of lateral ties in one column
From Figure 3-13 prepare an order of 10 mm. steel bars
7.00 m. ht . for making the lateral ties.
= 23.3 pcs.
.30
..,.
4. The 23 pcs. is the distance between the lateral ties,
!--.30 . m . ~
what we need is the number of ties in one column, so, I
we add one to be exact. 20-mm
Cofumn Reinforcemen t ,( .

r 23 + · 1 = 24 pcs. .I
.30m .

•I 5. Solve for the total ties of the 26 columns.

. I, '
I

10mm.
Later a i Ties - -J I
··r
.30m.
26 x 24 = 624 pcs.
.. L Inner ties 10 mm. ·
l
l 6. Find the. length of one lateral tie.
FIGURE 3-13
By Inspection = 1.20 m. long
~

7. Determine the number of 1.20 m. cut from a

t 6.00 m. steel bar Solution
.
6.00 --
Tio 5 pcs . 1. This problem is an improvement of illustration 3-7.
Wh~re the outer ties have been fot,rnd to be 125 pcs. 10
mm. x 6.00 m. What is to be determined hl:lre is the in-
ner ties.

86 Bi
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTIO'N ESTIMATE METAL REINFORCEMENT

2. By inspection the length of the inner tie is 83 cm. Given Data:

,3. Determine how many 83 cm. could be cut in a 6.00 m. Number of Columns = 16 pcs.
steel bar Size
600
= 25 x 40 cm.
= 7.23 pcs. Clear Height 4.60 m.
83 L.T. Spqcing = 25 cm.
4. Disregard the fractional value of .2J accept 7 pcs. and Solution
Divide: 624 pcs. by 7 pcs. (See 5 of illustration 3-7)
1. By inspection there are 3 types of tie:
624
= 89 pcs. of 10 mm. x 6.00 m.
7
a) outer ties = 120 cm. long
,
5. Total: 125 + 89 = 214 pcs. 10 mm x 6.00 mm.
b) inner ties = 85 cm; long
c) straight ties = 50 cm. long·

2. Determine how many 120 cm., 85 cm. and 50 cm. long

1llustration 3-9
could be made out from one 6.00 m. steel bar.

From Figure 3-14 prepare an order of 10 mm steel bars

Outer ties: =
~ making the lateral ties including the tie wire required. 600
5 pcs.
120
~
~
Ll I
Inner ties: 600
85
= 7 pcs.

l
,l.J.I I
I U- F----=!ft-Stca;ghHie,

I ' 'I I
Outer ties

loae,t;.,
":,

-- iJ,/
Straight ties: 600
----
-50
= 12 pcs.

3. Determine the number of ties in one column

I l 4.60 m. ht .
i-- 25 cm. ---i 25 cm ,
= 18.4 say 19 pcs.
!. . 25

-- 4. Total ties for 16 columns

.FIGURE 3-14 19 x 16 = 304 pcs.

88
89
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
METAL REINFORCEMENT

5. Divide 304 by each type of tie (in step 2)

304 = 60.8 say 61 pcs.

5
TABLE 3-6 NUMBER OF LATERAL TIES IN ONE STEEL BAR AND
QUANTITY PER METER LENGTH OF CdLUMN
304 = 43.4 pcs. SPACING OF NUMBER OF LENGTH OF NUIIIIBER OF CUT IN ONE
7 LATERAL
TIES
LATERAL TIES with STEEL BAR-LENGTH
TIES Hook & Bend
in cm. Per Meter in cm. 5.00 m. 6.00 m. 7.50 m. 9.00 m. 12.00 m.
304 = 25.3 pcs. Height pcs. pcs. pcs. pcs. pcs.
12 1~ 6.70 60 X 10 X 15 20
70 7 X X X 17
2,0 5.15 80 6 X X 11 15
6. Order: 130 pcs. of 10 mm x 6.00 m. bars 85 X 7 X X .14
25 4.13 90 X X 8 10 13
Note: The fractionat value of .4 and .3 was considered 95 5 X X X )(
30 3.43 100 5 6 X 9 12
as one which was included in the order. 105 X X 7 X X
"35 3.00 ltO X X X 8 X
115 5
I
X X X X
40 2.64 120 4 5 X X 10
7. Solving for the tie wire: 125 4 X 6 X X
45 2.36 130 X X X X 9
135 X X X X X
w a) Number of Joints per lateral tie by direct coun- 50 2.14 140 X 4 X X X
4 6
,. ting = 12 55 1.96
145,
150
160
X
X
3
4
X
5
5
X
6
X
X
8
X
60 I.Bl 170 )( X X 5 7
~ b) Number of ties in a column 180 X X 4 5 X

• 12. x 19 = 228 pcs.

190
200
X
X
3
3
X
X
X
X
X
6

x - not advisable length for.economical reason.

I c) Total tie wire for the 16 columns

I
i;..
228 ·x 16 = 3,648 pcs.
~,, Table 3-6 was prepared to simplify further the estimate for
'
d) Multiply by the length of each tie say 30 cm. '
~ \:.column lateral ties and sfirrups for beams and girders. Jt will be
i·t 3,648 x .30 m. = 1,094.4 m. ' .
:!( noted that there are x - entry in the Table which simply means
'i~:that- such length of steel bar is not recommended for economi-
C e) Divide by 53 m. length per kilogram lcal reason. The main objective of this Table is to guide the esti-
1,094.4 _= 20 6 iimator in the selection of a reinforcing· bar whose length when
53 . r/divided by the· length of each lateral tie will avoid extra cut of
say 21 kilograms of No. 16 G.I. wire ~:1.1nwanted length. To use the table,· consider the following
-~
-~xample.

90
91
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE METAL REINFORCEMENT

Illustration 3-10
4. Referring to Table 3-6, for a 125 cm. outer ties
Divide:
A building has 12 columns with a cross sectional dimension
of 30 cm. x 40 cm. each with a clear height of 7.00 meters. 432
Prepare an order of 10 mm steel bars for the lateral ties spaced 6
= 72 pcs. 10 mm x 7.50 m. bars
at 20 cm. or
I• 432
- --- 4 = 108 pcs. 10 mm x 5.00 m. bars

T_r-3□ rn7
I
I
:
5. From Table 3-6 for the 80 cm. Inside tie
:
Divide:
I
F 432
t Col. Reinforceme nt ,- - '
.40m.
6 72 pcs. 10 mm x 5.00 m. bars

i
r'
P'
r·
10 mm.
Lateral ties t
20 m.
C
l 6. Order:
72 pcs. 10 mm. x 7.50 m. steel bars
72 pcs. 10 mm. x 5.00 m. steel bars

i
t --
Solving for the Tie Wire

~ L Total number of lateral ties = 432

FIGURE 3-15 2. Total number of vertical reinforcement = 8

I Solution

1. By inspection there are two types of lateral ties

a) outer ties
b) inside ties
=
=
125 cm. long w/ hook
80 cm. long w/ hook
3. Multiply:
432 X 8 =

4. If the length of each tie is 40 cm.

3,456

Multiply:

'
2. Find the total length of the 12 columns
3,456 x .40 m. = 1,382.4 meters
I 12 x 7.00 m. = 84.00 meters ,

I 5. Divide by 53 meters (the length of tie wire in one kilo)

3. Referring to Table 3-6 spacing at 20 cm.
Multiply: 1,382.4
= 26 kilograms
84 x 5.15 = 432 pcs. 53

92
l 93
 -k [ 1.,:--; ,:1
' ~ ,
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE METAL REINFORCEMENT

3-10 STIRRUPS FOR BEAMS AND GIRDERS /1.Lf_,.·

U,: t 1

Stirrup· is the structural reinforcing member that ho.Ids or

binds together the main reinforcement of a beam or girder ·to a o,J'Jff
designed position.

The two types of stirrups commonly used are: 10 mm. Stirrups

1. closed stirrups 2. open stirrups

::--.
~~
FIGURE 3-17

Solution

1. By direct counting there are 24 stirrups at 98 cm. say

1.00 m. long
Open Stirrups Closed Stirrups

2. Total number of s~irrups

FIGURE 3-16
24 x 8 beani:s = 192 pcs.
The methods in estimating the number or quantity of stir-
rups required is the same as t_hat of the lateral ties as explained 3. Referring to Table 3-6 for a 1.00 m. long stirrups using a
5.00 m. long steel bars.
in Article 3-9 with the aid of Table 3-6. However, the spacing of
the stirrups could not be determined by the linear meter me- Divide:
thod because the spacing of stirrups become closer as it ap- 192
proaches the beam support. The number o"f stirrups is best de- 5
= 38.4 pcs. 10 mm. x 5.00 m.
termined by direct counting per span type and by categories ac-
cording to the design as indicated in the detailed drawing. or using a 6.00 m. long steel bars.
Divide:
Illustration 3~ 11

A concrete beam with a cross sectional dimension of 25 x 192

32.0 pcs. 10 mm x 6.00 m.
40 cm. requires 10 mm open stirrups spaced as shown in Figure 6
3-17. Prepare the order of 10 mm. steel bars for stirrups of 8
beams with.the same category. 4. Orde'r: 32 pcs. of 10 mm x 6.00 m. steel bars

94, 95
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE METAL REINFORCEMENT

Comment:
Solution
If 5.00 m. steel bar is chosen, the order will be 39 pcs. not 38.4
because we cannot order .4 pieces of steel bar. After cutting the stirrups A. Spiral Reinforcement
there will be an excess of .6 meter which is equivalent to 3.00 meters long.
To be exact a 6.00 meter steel bars was chosen unless the extra length is
intended for use on other parts of the construction the 39 pcs. at 5.00 m. 1. Find the total length of the 14 columns
order is alright.
7 x 14 = 98 meters
3-11 SPIRAL AND COLUMN TIES
2. From Table 3-7 for a 50 cm. column diameter
The spiral reinforcement consist of evenly spaced conti- 5.00 cm. pitch.
nuous spirals held firmly in place by at least three vertical bar , Multiply:
spacers. The center to center spacing. of this spirals should not
exceed 6th part of the diameter core. The clear spacing between 98 x 3.223 = 315.8 say 316 pcs. ,.
the spirals should not exceed 7.5 cm. nor less than 5.00 cm. or
one and one half times the biggest size of the coarse aggregate 3. Order: 316 pcs. 10 mm x 9.00 m. steel bars
or gravel.
8. Tie Wire
Illustration 3-12.
1. Find the number of vertical bars per column = 12
A spiral column with a cross sectional diameter of 50 cm.
requires 10 mm spiral reinforcement as shown in Figure 3-18.
2. Referring to Table 3-7 for a 5 cm. pitch
If there are 14 columns at 7.00 meters high each, find the num- Multiply:
ber of 10 mm steel bars needed for a 5.00 cm. pitch.
12 x 21 turns per meter = 252 ties

3. Total tie wire for 14 column bar intersections at

1JllJV1i q~Jllt - Col. Reinf.
7.00 m. ht.

, _ _ Spiral ties -----;c11s\

252 x 7.00 m x 14 = 24,696. pcs.

4. Total length of the wire at .30 m. long per tie wire

µ.o cm. pitch

24,696 ·X .30 = 7,409 m.
5. Convert to kilogram at 53 m. long/kilo
SPIRAL COLUMN Divide:
7409
FIGURE 3-18 ~ = 139.8 say 140 kilos

96
97
J
 METAL REINFORCEMENT
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

5.00 21 5.498 3.602 2.678

6. Order: 114 kilos No. 16 G.I. wire 55.0 6.25 17 4.451 2.916 2.168
7.50 14.3 3.752 2.458 1.828
5.00 21 6.077 3.981 2.960
60.0 6.25 17 4.919 3.223 2.396
7.50 14.3 4.146 2.717 2.020
TABLE 3-7 NUMBER OF SPIRAL REINFORCING BARS PER
METER HEIGHT* 5.00 21 7.234 4:740 3.524
70.0 6.25 17 5.856 3.837 2.853
COL.DIAM. PITCH NO.OF.TURN NUMBER OF STEEL BARS AT
7.50 14.3 4.936 3.234 2.. 405
in cm. in cm. per meter
height 6.00 m long 9.00 m. long 12.00 m. 5.00 21 8.391 5.498 4.088
80.0 6.25 17 6.793 4.451 3.310
5.00 21 2.604 1.706 1,269 7.50 14.3 5.726 I 3.752 2.790 .
30.0 6.25 17 2.108 1.381 1.027
7.50 14.3 1.778 1.165 .866 5.00 21 9.549 6.256 4.652
90.0 6.25 17 7.730 . 5.064 3.766
5.00 21 2.894 . 1.896 1.410 7.50 14.3 6.366 4.171 3.101
32.5 6.25 17 2.342 1.535 1.141
7.50 14.3 1.975 1.294 .962 5.00 21 10.706 7.014
. 5.216
100.0 6.25 17 8.667 5.678 4.222
5.00 21 3.183 2.085 1.550 7.50 14.3 7.137 . 4.676 3.477
35.0 6.25 17 2.577 1.688 1.255
7.50 14.3 2.172 1.423 1.058 * ·values· given includes the end-lap or splice allowance.
-
5.00 21 3.472 2.275 1.692
37.5 6.25 17 2.811 1.842 1.393
7.50 14.3 2.370 1.524 1.154

5.00 21 3.762 2.465 1.833 3-12 ONE WAY REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB
40.0 6.25 17 3.045 1.995 1.484
7.50 14.3 2.567 1.682 1.251
Illustration
'
5.00. 21 4.051 2.654 1.974
42.5 6.25 17 3.281 2.149 1.598
7.50 14.3 2.765 1.812 1.347 From Figure 3-19. Determine the number of steel bars re-
I quired including the tie wire.
i 5.00 21 4.340 2.844 2.115
!'I 45.0 6.25 17 3.513 2.302 1.712
7.50 14.3 2.962 1.940 1.443
~ Solution

t
(,
47.5
5.00
6.25
7.50
21
17
14.3
4.630
3.748
3.159
3.033
2.455
2.070
2.256
1.826
1.539 1. Given Data:
! 5.00 21 4.919 3.223 2.397
Spacing of Main Reinforcement 150 mm. (.15 m.)
50.0 6.25 17 3.982 2.609 1.940
Temp. Bars Spacing = 250 mm. (.25 m)
·7.50 14.3 3.357 2.199 1.635 Size of the Reinforcement - 13 mm.¢
_ Type of Reinforcement = One Way

98
99
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
METAL REINFORCEMENT

Ii I ,l,_
·7 .I
I
'
1 l Temp. Bars
/ I
I I
I
--...Cut Bars
'
.\
I
1

I
1.07! m.· 6. Total Main Reinforcing Bars
32.33 + 8 = 40.33 pcs.
I J I
I

4.30m.
II
11 I
I
-,
I

I
Straight bars ' I
I
I

I 2.15 m.
· 7. Solve for the Temperature bars at 2.15 m. span
I
Bend Bu.rs I I \.
I c.,..
I
I
I
I
I
\ I I
I :,,
~2; 5 + 1 = 9.6 pcs.

,,
_ _j ._
I
,, I"\ Cut Bars

Temp: 8~
I
I :, -- lr1
II

m.
8. Temperature bars at 1.075 span
-
Ii II
T
1.075
.25
+ l = 5.3
4.70 m.
One-w.1y Slab

FIGURE 3-19 9. Multiply by 2 layers at 2 sides

5.3 x 4 = 21.2 pcs.
2. Determine the number of Main Reinforcement
4.70 . 10. Add resultof_.B'7and 9
_ m. + 1 = 32.33 pcs. 5.00 m. steel bar
15
9.6 + 21.2 = 30.8 pcs.
1
Note: In dividing the length by the bar spacing what is
found is the number of spacing, add one (1) to get the 11. Summary total of 6 and 10
number of bars.
40.33 + 30.8 = 71.1 pcs, 13 mm x 5.00 m.
, steel bar
3. Determine the length of the cut bars alternate to main
reinforcement
2nd Solution: By the Area Method
1.075 + .175 (hook) = 1.25 meters
1. Solve for the area of the floor
4. Using a 5.00 m. steel hars
5.00 4. 70 x 4.30 = 20.21 sq~ m.
1.25 = 4 pcs. number of cut bar in one steel bar
2. Referring to Table 3-8 using 5.00 m. bars @ 150 mm
5. Divide: Step 2 by step 4 spacing
32.33 Multiply:
~ = 8 pcs. 5.00 m. steel bar
20.21 x 3.524 = 71.2 pcs.

100 ~-
101
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE METAL REINFORCEMENT

i Iii 1:111111_ ;1 JII Ill !!I i JL,Jj' _:_

Solving for Tie Wire@ 25 cm. o.c.
r -H~IH.t-l'H!I-IJl-+ll-m:a:,.~
.tl!ll!III _I I

I
1. Referring to Table 3-8 1.80 m. I '
II ''I 11
I
T,--
J I
Multiply: 71--,.---~

ft~
Bend Bar~,, .L

20.21 x .163 = 3.29 ki'los No. 16 G.I. Wire 11.

BAR
TABLE 3-8 QUANTITY OF STEEL BARS AND TIE WIRES IN A

SPACING
on center
ONE WAY REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB

NUMBER OF STEEL BARS PER SQUARE METER

5.00 m
LENGTH OF
TIE WIRE
6.00 m 7.50 m. 9.00 m. 12.00 m. 25 cm. 30 cm.
3.60 m.

~• I ±
_J
V1c,c:
7.20m.

I
mm pcs. pcs. pcs. ll==t:t=i~l;l:::f#:::tt=tl=ffl=llt=m:=tF=l#=lll=F=IF=IF'=F.'1=?T. ~,
l.r_~=
pcs. pcs. kg. per sq. m.

'
100 4.493 3.667 2.856 2.320 1.834 .242 .291
I
I I I I I I ' •
125 3.911 3.186 2.483 2.015 1.593 .197 - Temp. Bars
.236
-r----------7.20 m.--~-----+--
Two-way Slab
ISO 3.524 2.866 2.234 1.812 1.433 .163 .195
FIGURE 3-20
175 3.247 2.637 2.056 1.667 1.319 .141 .169
I
Solution
200 3.039 2.465 1.192 1,558 1.233 .126 .152

225 2.878 2.332 1.819 1.473 1.166 .111 .133

1. Solve for the main reinforcement
3 60 '
250 2.749 2.225 1.737 1.405 1.113 -101 .121 .i
0
+ 1 = 3 7 pcs.

275 2.643 2.138 1.669 1.350 1.069 .091 .109

2. There are two way - run
300 2.554 2.065 1.612 1.304 1.033 .086 37 · x 2 = 74 pcs. steel bars
.103

3-13 TWO WAY REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB 3. For cut bars @ 1.87 long there_ are 4 pcs. cut in one
7 .50 stee·I bar
Illustration
74
From Figure 3-20, determine the numper of 13 mm <lJ steel = 18.5 pcs. steel bars
4
bar and tie wire required.

102
l ,.5b '(f\ - 5-lu.£ ~OJ
103
~ itOrnrY"\ SpDlc;n_9
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE METAL REINFORCEMENT

TABLE 3-9 QUANTITY OF STEEL BARS AND TIE WIRES

4. Temperature bars at 1.80.m. span
IN A TWO WAY REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB

BAR NUMBER OF STEEL BARS PER SQ. M. LENGTH OF

1.80
+ 1 = 8.2 pcs. SPACING TIE WIRE
.25 on·center 5.00 m 6.00 m 7.50 m 9.00 m 12.00 m. 25 cm. 30 cm.
mm pcs. pcs. pcs. pcs. pcs. kg. per sq. m.

10:0 4.953 3.995 I 3.050 3.047 · 2.000 .364 .437

5. Multiply by 4 sides at 2 layers
12.5 4.409 3.549 2.703 Z.734 1.775 .279 .335
15.0 4.047 3.252 2.471 2.524 1.626 .238 .286
8.2 x 8 = 65.6 pcs. 17.5 3.788 3.039 2.306. 2.377 1.520 .20~ .250
20.0 · 3.594 2.880 2.1 82 · 2.266 1.440 .185 .222
6. Summary total of step 2, 3 arid 5 22.5 3.443 2.756 2.085 2.179 , 1.378 .168 .202
25.0 3.322 2.656 2.008 2.109 1.328 .156 .187
27.5 3.223 2.575 1,945 2.053 1.288 .146 .175
74 + 18.5 + 65.6 = 158 pcs. 30.0 3.141 2.507 1.892 2.005 1.254
\
.138 .165
I

3-14 Concrete Pipe Reinforcement

Second Solution by the Area Method
From Figure 3-21, solve for the steel reinforcem·ent using
1. Area of the floor slab = 51.84 sq. m.
10 mm and number 16 Tie Wire.

2. Referring to Table 3-9, for 7.50 m. steel bars @100 mm

spacing t Pipe
. Re inf. Ring· ~
Co nre e ) .,,,.-~""
U@,J
51.84 x 3.050 = 158 pcs.

3. Order: 158 pcs. 13 mm x 7.50 m. steel bars

Solve for No 16 G.I. wire@ .30 m. 1.00 m.

1. Referring to Table 3-9

51.84: x .437 = 22.65 say 23 kilos FIGURE 3-21

104 105

J
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
II chapter 4
Solution
L Solve for the circumference of the circle at midpoint
of the concrete "t".

C = 1Td
LUMBER
C = 3.1416 x (.90 + .10)
= 3.1416 X . 1.00 m.
3.1416 m. 4-1 WOOD

2. Total length of one ring add .15 m. splice Wood is that fibrous substance which compose the trunk
and branches of the tree that lies between the pith and the
j,tl'
3.1416 + .15 = 3.29· m. bark. The versatility of using wood in the construction has

r: 3. Find the total number of ring at .20 cm. o.c.

, lifted it to its present importance and high demand in almost
', all types of construction.

l.
~,Ip.
1.00 ht .
.20
5 + 1 to get the total no. Even with the introduction and acceptance of new ma-
of ring = 6 pcs. terials and methods of construction, wood is evidently much in
,..
:·1,'
use. Wood because of its strength, light in weight, durability and
ease of fastening has become one of the most important
,,
,~Ml
4. Temp. Bars@ .25 m. o.c.
building material
~1,
111 3.1416
= 12.56 say 13 pcs.@ 1.00 4-2 DEFINITION OF TERMS
.25
Tie Wire, Lumber is the term applied to wood after it is sawed or
I
l~"' sliced into boards, planks, timber, etc.
....
I 1. The number of ring multiplied by the number of tem-

....
perature bars. ,, Rough Lumber is the term applied to unplaned or un-
~ '~dressed lumber.

,,,.. 6 x 13 = 78 pcs.@ .30 m. long per tie wire

Surface or Dressed Lumber is a planed lumber having at
... 2. Total length: 78 x .30 = 23.40 m. feast <;>ne smooth side.

3. Divide by 53 to find the weight in kg. , s2s; s4s are dressed lumber wherein the number connotes
,he number of smooth side such as s2s means smooth on two
23.40 = .44 kilos number 16 Tie Wire "des and s4s for four sides.
53

107
106
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE LUMBER

Slab is a kind of rough lumber which is cut tangent to the 1. Mode of Growth
annual rings running the full length of the log and containing
at least one flat surface. a) Exogeneous are those outward growing trees which
are most preferred for lumbering.
Timber is a piece of lumber five inches or. 13 cm. or larger
in its smallest dimension. b) Endogeneous are those inside growing trees which
are not preferred for lumbering because they pro-
Plank is a wide piece of lumber from 4 to 13 cm. thick. duced a soft center core.

Board is a piece of lumber less than 4 cm. thick with at

least 10 cm. wide. 2. Density - Density is either

Flitch is a thick piece of lumber.

a) Soft
b) Hard
Fine Grained when the annual! rings are small the grain or
marking which separates the adjacent rings is said to be fine ·
grained. When large, it is called Coarse Grained. 3. Leaves - The leaves of the tree is either

Straight Grained when the direction of th.e fibers are near- a) Needle shape
ly parallel with the side and edges of the board, it is said to be b) Broad shape
straight grained.
4. Shade or Color
Crooked or Cross-Grained is a lumber taken from a
crooked tree. a) White
b) Yellow
~ c) Red
d) Brown
~
4-3 CLASSIFICATION OF WOOD ·e) Black, etc.

Wood used in building construction are those wood which·, 5. Grain

. grows larger by addition of layer on the outer surface each''
year known to botanist as Exogens. a) Straight
b)- Cross
c) Fine
Wo_od are classified according to: d) Coarse

108 ,09
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE LUMBER

The.methods and manner of log sawing are:

6. Nature of the surface when sawed
1. Plain or Bastard Sawing
a) Plain
b) Grained 2. Quarter or Rift Sawing
c) Figured or Marked
a) Radial
b) Tangential
c) Quarter Tangential
d) Combined Radial and Tangential
Sapwood IIK¥ "-r ',~ Modular Rays

Pitch I.Cl.~ Outer Bark Combined Radial and

Heartwood Tangential
Ca•mb;ium
~ Inner Bark

Cross Section of a Tree

..
"I ~
.,...,
-- ==-- g~;:-~;- Quarter Tangential Ta·ngential Plain or
Bastard Sawing

Crooked Grain Gross Grain Straight Grain

Star Shake

. FIGURE 4-1
ind or Cupr
ke

4-4 METHODS OF SAWING THE LOG Broken

Branch

Lumbering is the term applied to the operations per- "'' ~1,·.,t,~~

_rJw~
formed in preparing the wood for commercial purposes.
Logging is the process or operation from cutting of trees,
hauling and delivering of wood to the sawmill for sawing. Saw-
ing on. the otherhand, is the operation of cutting the logs into ·FIGURE 4-2
commercial sizes of lumber.
. 111
110
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE LUMBER

4-5 DEFECTS IN WOOD wood from shrinkage or decay. Experiments have proven that
wood which are immersed in water immediately after cutting
Defects are irregularities found in wood. The most into flitches is less subject to splitting and decay, it reduces war-
common defects in wood are: ping but becomes brittle and less elastic. Soaking of wood into
liquid is the method of seasoning introduced and practiced by
l. Caused by Abnormal Growth the ancient Roman builders.

a) Heart Shakes are radial cracks originating at the The methods of seasoning lumber are:
heart of the logs commonly found in old trees.
l. Natural or Air Seasoning is considered as one of the
b) Wind Shakes or Cup Shakes are cracks or breaks best method of seasoning lumber, although the period involved
is relatively longer.
across the annual rings of the wood during its
growth caused by excessive bending of the tree due
to strong wind. 2. Artificial_ Seasoning is a process wherein the lumber is
stacked in a drying kiln and then exposed to steam and hot air.
c) Star Shakes are composed of several heart shakes Wood from this process llndergoes quick drying and is classified
which radiate from the center of the log in star- as quite inferior in quality as compared to those lumber sea-
soned by the natural or air seasoning method.
1ike manner.

d) Knots occurs. at the starting point of a limb or · The artificial seasoning methods emptoyed are:
branch of the wood. a) Forced Air Drying
b) Kiln: Drying
2. Due to Deterioration c) Radio Frequency Dieletric Drying

a) Dry Rot is caused by fungi in a seasoned lumber due Good seasoning is the first consideration for a successful
to the presence of moisture. preservation of wood. Wood does not decay naturally through
age, nor will it decay if it is kept constantly dry or continuously
bJ Wet rot takes place sometime in the growth of the. submerged in water.
tree caused by water saturation .
The common causes of decay in wood are:
•
~
1) Alternate moisture and dryness
4-6 SEASONING OF LUMBER
2} Fungi and Molds
By nature, trees contain moisture in their ce!I layers. These 3.) Insects and Worms
moisture has to be expelled thoroughly in order to preserve the 4) Heat and Confined Air

112 113

(
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE LUMBER

The process of preserving wood are: Where:

D = is. the smaller diameter of log
1) External - the wood is coated with preservative L = the length of the log
(as paint) which penetrates the fiber. 4 = slab reduction allowance

2) Internal - a chemical compound is impregnated at

a pressure to permeate the wood tho- Illustration 4-2
roughly.
Find the total board foot of lumber that could be derived
from a 28 inches diameter log by 20 feet long;
4-7 UN·IT OF MEASURE OF LUMBER

Board foot is the unit of measure used 'in computing vo-

lume of lumber despite the introduction of the metric measure.
One board foot simply mean one square foot by one inch thick
f . • - . r l , ' . ; : : - ~ ~· - :-.-- -
.... , ..
or equivalent to 144 c;u. inches. The width and thickness of the D=2B" llf.:\l ,- :· -,.....:..:.:... - - - ... ,.
commercial lumber are expressed in inches while the length are ·, .-,,:..-,,:.0,..:::::,__ . ; •J~~---~"~~::....~•--Q<"

in feet of even number. Board foot is found by dividing the pro-

duct of the thickness times the width and the length by 12.
r 6.00 m (20 ft.)

FIGURE 4-3

Illustration 4-1 Solution

2
(28 - 4) x 20 • = 720 bd. ft.
Find the board foot of 5 pieces 2" x 6" x 14' lumber. 16

Solution Prior to the introduction of sawmills, the manner of saw-

5 X 2 X 6 X 14 = 70 bd. ft. ing lumber is by manual hand sawing which is still common to-
12 day in· lumbering at the forest and in the rural areas. The me-
thods being adopted in computing the labor cost for sawing
How to determine the number of board foot in a log. are:
2
_ (D-4) L
Bd. Ft. Volume -
16 1. By the board foot or
2. By the pulgada system

114 115
 '
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
LUMBER

The Board foot method is simply finding the total board

Line of Cutting
foot of sawed lumber multiplied by the agreed unit price. The
Pulgada System is computed by multiplying the width in inches
by the length of lumber in meter, the result is then multiplied
by the unit price. ~4"
j

----------20':.._--------r
Illustration 4-3 6"

In slicing a 6" x 6" x 3.00 m. to a 2" x 6" x 3.00 m. lum- FIGURE 4-5
ber, how much will it cost if the unit price is 50 centavos per
pulgada? Solution
Line of Cutting
1. The first run of the saw along_ 14 inches
Convert: 20 ft. = 6.00 meters
_____ ., __ -----------1 14 x 6.00 m. = 84 pulgada
6"
2. The succeeding run along the 12" is
~
6" : • ..t
. 12 x 6.00 m. = 72 per run
3.00 m.
FIGURE 4-4 3. Total run: 72 x 6 = 432 pulgada

Solution 4. 432 + 84 = 516 x -P0.50 = P258.00

1. Multiply the width by the length
6 x 3.00 = 18 pulgadas. 4-8. WOOD POST

2. Multiply by the number of run or slice In estimating wooden post for building structure, there are
18 x 2 = 36 pulgadas only three things to consider:

3. Finding the cost a) The size of the post

36 X "¥0.50 = p 18.00 ~
b) Th~ guantity or number of posts
Illustration 4-4 c) The length of the post

How rnuch will it cost to convert a 12" x 14" x 20 ft. lum- The size of the post is already indicated in the plan. The
ber to a size of .2" x 6" x 20 ft. at ~ price of P0.50 per pulga- · quantity or number of the post is determ_ined through direct
da? C<;)unting basea from the detailed plan of the building. The
le11gth is determined under the following considerations:
116
117
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE LUMBER

a) For a one storey building verify if the elevation Solution:

height indicates from floor to ceiling, if the ceili"ng is be-
low the girts, then, add the depth of the girts, and the 1. Find the total height from floor to ceiling
bottom chord or the rafters to the height or length of the 2.70 + 2.70 = 5.40 meters
post.
2. Determine the depth of girder, floor joist, flooring and
b) For a two storey building verify if the height indi- girts.
cates from floor to floor, if .so, then consider the additio-
nal length for the girders, floor, joist and the flooring. Girder .20
For the second floor, add the depth of the girts, bottom Floor Joist = .15
· chord 01· rafters to the height of the post. Flooring = .025
Girts = .20
c) If the plan calls for post splices, add the lapping .575 m.
length to the height of the post as indicated in the plan.
3. Add the result of 1 and 2
d) Remember that the commercial length of lumber is 5.40 + .575 = 5.975 m.
always of even number or divisible by two, if the ·compu-
ted length is odd number adjust the order to the next even 4. Convert to feet
number or length. 5.975 m. = 19.9 ft .
.30
Illustration 4-5 5. Order length = 20 feet

From Fi.gure 4-6, determine the length ofthe wooden post

required.
, 4i-9 GIRDER

c::::=r== -· =--;n:~ l zo "' The Girder is the structural part of a building that carries
2.70 m. the floor joists and the flooring. Its quantity is determined by
the Direct Counting Method based from the floor framing of
.025 ~ Floorin~
the building plan, the length however, is determined under the
.20 m. Girder follqwing considerations.
2.70m.

1. If the span or distance of the post is indicated from

center fo center, the length of the girder is equal to the
FIGURE 4-6 span plus the width or one side of the post.

118 119

l
 LUMBER
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

Flo.or Joists---~ 4. if the span or distance of the post indicates inside mea-
surement, the length of the girder is equal to the span
plus the two width or sid~s of the post.

5. If the second storey has an overhang floor wherein

L = s·pan + 2 (½ side 01 post) the girder has to carry the floor joists, the length of
the girder is equai to the span as stated above plus the
FIGURE 4-7 overhang length.

2. If the span of the post indicates from outer to outer

side of the post.the girder length is equal to the span of Floor Joists

the post.
Floor Joists----, ...r\.-',-
0
T & G Flooring - i

Girder 0
0
J],q
0
T & G Flooring 0 Q

0 Girder Overhang
0
L = Span + 2 sides of Post
Post

L = Span of Post FIGURE 4-10

FIGURE 4-8 Illustration 4-6

If the. span or distance indicates from center to outer From Figure 4-11 what girder length shall be ordered?
3.
side of the posts, the length of the girder is equal to the
span plus one half the width of the post.
Floor Joists - - - - ,
Floor Joists---- T & G Flooring
T & G Flooring - -

0 0
0 0
Girder 0
0 Girder 0
0
Post---,....1
3.00 m. .60m.

L = Span +½Side of Post

Overhang I
L = Span + Overhang+ 2( ½ Side of Post}

FIGURE 4-9 FIGURE 4-11

·121
120
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION.ESTIMATE LUMBER

; I, Solution
I j:( The T & G is the popular name for Tongue and Groove
wooden board used for flooring, ceiling, forms etc. The thick-
1. Determine the span and the overhang. ness varies from 18 mm to 25 mm while its width also varies
3.00 + .60 = 3.60 m. from 5 to 15 cm. Other sizes for Architectural purposes could
I i.i be made and obtained through special order.
2. Add the width of the two posts
3.60 + 2(.15) = 3.90 m.

3. Convert to feet
iii 3 90 This is an odd number, adjust to
· = 13 ft.
:1
,:i
.30 the next even number. r:iz¼-,,-;;~~
\ . '

Groove TonguP ,
4. Order: 14 ft. long T & G Fl'ooring

4-10 FLOOR JOIST AND T & G FLOORING

FIGURE 4-13
! i
I; Floor Joist is the structural member of a building that
I• carries the wood flooring. The best way of estimating floor joist There are two methods presented in this Chap-
i ,i ter on -how to determine the required number of pieces and
I is by direct counting method based from the detailed floor fra-
:,,'1 board feet of T & G for a given area.
:iii
1,q, ,_ ming plan of the building wherein the actual number and length
I. ,,, of the joist could be determined accurately.
! i; 1. Direct counting method
2. The number of pieces per meter run
Girder

,,, TABLE 4-1 QUANTITY OFT & G BOARD PER METER RUN
,1 SIZE OF BOARD SIZE OF BOARD DIRECT COUNTING
:cl ill irJches ill mm NO.OF BOARD
, II II II Solid Briding METHOD ADDITIONAL per meter rurJ
% FOR TONGUE AND
SHRINKAGE
II-- II• II II II• II Floor Joists
1 X 3 20 X 75 1.250 i6.66
, II II Girc!er
1 X 4 20 X 100 -1.222 12.20
1 X 5 20 X 125 1.167 9.34
1 X 6 20 X 150
FIGURE4-12 1.153 7.70
'i

i 122
::, ' 123
ii
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION'•ESTIMATE LUMBER

Illustration 4-7 4. Determine the span of the joist in feet

3.50
From the floor framing plan as showi:, in Figure 4.-14, de-
_
30
= 11 .6 6 say 12 ft.
termine the number and board foot of floor joist and the T & G Order: 36 pcs. 2" x 6" x 12 ft. = 432 bd, ft.
flooring.

. B. Solid Bridging

T
I'
I'
rs 2" x 6" Floor Joists
I' 1. Span of girder
3.50 m. "" 5 .oo = 16.66 ft .
Bridging
.30

l
r-...

~ 2. Total number of joists

18 x 2 inches thickness
Girder
" = 36 inches or 3 feet
5.00 m. 5.00 m.
3. Subtract from step 1
16.66 - 3 ft. = 13.66 ft.

FIGURE 4-14
4. For solid bridging
Order: 2 pcs. 2" x 6" x 14 ft. = 28 bd. ft.
Solution

A. Floor Joist C. T & G Flooring

1. By Direct Counting _1st Solution: By Direct Counting,

l; 5.00
- ~ = 16.66
1, The length of the girder is the length of the T & G
I flooring
~ 2, Add one to get the actual number of joists 5
:~~ = 16.66 say 18 ft.
16.66 + 1 = 17.66 say 18 pcs.

3. Fortwospans 2. Determine the number of.4" (.10 m.) T & G Board

18 x 2 = 36 pcs. 3.50 x 2 span = 70 pcs .

l
. 10

124 125
 LUMBER
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

The thickness of these boards varies from 13, 16 or 20 mm.

3. Referring to Table 4-1
and the width from 15 to 20 cm. of even length from 1.80 to
Multiply:
70 x 1.222 = 85.54 say 86 pcs. 6.00 meters or 6 to 20 feet.

4. Order: 86 pcs. l" x 4" x 18" T & G The procedure in estimating the quantity of siding wood
= 516 bd. ft. board is the same as that of the T & G wood flooring with the
aid of Table 4-2. H_owever, unlike the T & G wood flooring, the
2nd Solution: By the number of board per meter run siding board estimate has to consider the following factors:

1. Determine the length of T & G flooring 1. The area of the opening such as windows, doors and the
5 .00 = · 16.66 say 18 ft. like should be deducted from the area of the wall to be
.30 c;overed by the siding boards.
2. Referring to Table 4-1 using 4" (.10 m .) T & G
Multiply: 2. The length of the siding wood board should be specified
7.00 X 12.20 = 85.4 in the order to prevent joints.of the board in between
say 86 pcs. l" x 4" x 18' the span or height.
= 516 bd. ft .
· 3. The common error in determining the len'gth or height of
the board is the omission of the additional length for
4-11 SIDING WOOD BOARD
the girts, flooring, floor joist and girder length.
The common commercial siding wood boards are:

1. Stone cut TABLE 4-2 QUANTITY OF SIDING WOOD BOARD

2. Double Stone cut
COMMERCIAL SIZE NO.OF BOARD PER APPROX. BD. FT.
3. V-cut mm inches Meter Ru!l per sq. m.
4. BCB Cut
5. Weather cut, etc. 7.41
150 6 13.65
200 8 5.55 13.55

~~~
i

Single Cut Double Cut BCB

-Illustration 4-8
4%§;:·~---~,v-----~
From Figl'.lre 4-16 solve for the required _board foot and
Weather Cut nur:nber of 200 mm {8") double cut siding board.
V -Cut
FIGURE 4-15

127
126
.J
 .,..,.
•,·

-~\~~-
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE LUMBER

2nd Solution: By the Board Foot per Square Meter •·i

1. Solve for the wall area

A = 3.795 x 2.90
..20r A = 11 sq._m.

3.10 m .
2. Referring to Table 4-2

J___ _
.495 m.
~--
Multiply:
11 x 13.55 = 149 bd. ft.

· · 4-12 GIRTS, RAFTERS, TRUSS, PURLINS AND FASCIA

FIGURE·4-16 BOARD

Solution These iter:ns in building construction are determined by

1. Determine the total length of the board direct counting and measuring method. Members with shorter
Floor to ceiling = 3.10 m. length like collar. plate, struts, blocks for splice of joints, sway
Depth of Girts = .20 m. bridgihg etc. are computed according to their sizes combined
Flooring & Joist = ,17 m.
Depth of Girder = .25 m. • 'together and adjusted to the commercial length of lumber.
Studs = .075 m. For accuracy of estimating these items, a detailed drawing in-
dicating their sizes and length shall qe made as basis in finding
3.795 m. or 12.65 ft. the unit length of every parts.
T'otal length say 14 feet

2. Length of the wall 5.00 m.

Top Chord
Less the Opening = 2.10m. Diagonal Strut
Vertical Strut
Net Wall Length = 2.90m. r- Wood Bloc:k

3. Referring to Table 4-2 for a 200 mm. board

Multiply:
2.90 x 5.55 = 16 pcs.

4. Order: 16 pcs. ¾" x 8" x 14' double cut

= 149 bd. ft. FIGURE 4-17

129
128
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE LUMBER

4-13 STUDS Solution: By Direct Counting

Stud is the structural member in building construction 1. Find the number of vertical studs
where the siding of partition boards are nailed. It is sometimes
called the ribs of wooden walls or partitions. Lumber intended
6
:~g = 10 + l = 11 pcs. @ 10 ft.
for studs shall be straight and uniform in width either s2s or s4s
for uniformity and quality of the finished work. 2. Horizontal Studs
2
The advantages of using s2s or s4s lumber are: :~~ = 4.2 say 5 pcs. @ 20 ft.

1. Lumber are straight, uniform in thickness and of good , 3. Order:

quality.
Ve~ticaJ .Studs 11 pcs. 2" x 4" x 10' = 73.3 bd.ft
Horizontal Studs 5 pcs. 2" x · 4" x 20' = 66.6 bd.ft.
2. It is economical in terms of labor cost.
Total 139.9 bd.ft.
3. The work progress is not affected or delayed.

There are two methods presentec;l in this Chapter on how to

find the quantity of studs at a given vertical and horizontal
Solution: By the Area Method
spacing.

The Direct Counting Method is done by counting the num-

1. Solve for the area of the wall partiti,on
6.00 x 2.50 = 15 sq. m.
ber of vertical and horizontal member from a detailed plan in-
cluding its length. In the absence of a detailed drawing plan, an
2. Referring to Table 4-3, using 2 x 4 at .60 m. spacing
imaginary counting through mathematical computation will do
Multiply:
as an alternative.
15 x 9.333 = 140 bd. ft.
The Square Meter or Area Meth9d is simply finding the area
Comment
of the wall multiplied by the values given in Table 4-3 corres-
ponding to the size and spacing of the studs.
It will be noted that the computation by the area method
with ~he aid of Table 4-3 instantly gave the result in terms of
Illustration 4-9
board foot, unli.ke the first solution wherein the number of
A wal I partition 6.00 meters long by 2.60 meters high spe- pieces and the length were known outright ahead of the total
cify a 2" x 4" studs spaced at .60 m. o.c. both ways half lap joint board feet. However, as to which method will be adopted, de-
Find the total board feet required. pends_ u·pon the convenience and purpos~ of the estimator.

130
131
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
LUMBER

There are instances wherein small discrepancies arises bet-

ween the result of the two methods due to the adjustment of I \
lumber to the commercial length from odd _to even number. Li--, ,-, \

Naturally, the number of board feet. will increase while the area : I
to be covered remains the same. Under this circumstances 2.70 m.
small discrepancies between the result of the direct counting \
and the arec1 method could be possible but to a negligible I\
amount. ( \
' 8.00m.
Hor. strip @ .60-m. o.c.

TABLE 4-3 NUMBER OF BOARD FOOT OF STUDS AND FIGURE 4-18

NAILING JOIST PER .SQ. M.
1st Solution: By Direct Counting
LUMBER I SPACING IN METERS CENTER TO CENTER
SIZE 1. Find the vertical studs
.30 X .30 .30 X .60 .40 X .40 .40 X .60 .60 X .60
-8.00
-- ::::: 20 spacing
.
.40 .
X 2 4.230 3.256 3.208 2.771 2.333
Add one to get the actual number of studs
2 X 2 8.460 6.513 6.417 5.445 4.667 (See Figure 4-18)
20 + 1 = 21 studs
2 X 3 12.688 9.769 9.625 8.312 7.000
Order: 21 pcs. 2" x 3" x 10' : : : 105 bd. ft.
2 X 4 16.920 13.026 12.833 11.083 9.333
2. Find the horizontal studs
2 X 5 21.146 16.282 16.042 13.854 11.667
2.70 : : : 45
I I 14.000 _ .60 .
2 X 6 I 25.375 19.539 19.250 16.625
Add one (1) to get the actual number of studs
4.5 + 1 = 5.5 pcs. at 4.00 m.

Since the wall is 8.00 m. long, multiply:

5 .5 x 2 ::::: 11 pcs.
Illustration 4-10
Order: 11 pcs. 2" x 3" x 14' = 77 bd. ft.

A partition wall measures 8.00 m. long by 2.70 meters h\gh S_ummary

specify the use of 2" x 3" studs with a general spacing at .40
m_. for vertical and .60 m. for horizontal center to center 21 pcs. 2" x 3" x 10' = 105 bd. ft.
distance. 11 ·pcs. 2" x 3" x 14' = 77 bd. ft.
Total. = 182 bd. ft.
132

133
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTlMATE LUMBER

2nd Solution: By the Area Method , Illustration 4-11

1. Solve for the area of the wall partition Find the total board foot required for a 7.00 by 4.0_9
8 x 2.70 = 21.6 sq. m. meters bedroom using 2" x. 2" ceiling joist spaced at .40 x .40
m. on center.
2. Referring to Table 4-3 using 2 x 3 at .40 x .60 m. on
center spacing
Solution by Direct Counting
Multiply:.
21.6 x 8.312 = 179.54 say 180 bd. ft. 1. Find the number of joist perpendicular to 7.00 meters.
700 .
3. Note the difference of 2 bd. ft. between the two solu- :40 = 17.5 + 1 = 18.5 say19 pcs. at 4.00 m. or14 ft.
tions which is negligible.

2. Find the number of joist perpendicular to 4.00 m. span

4-14 CEILING JOIST

Ceiling Joist is a structural member in building construc-

4
:~g = 10 + 1 = 11 pcs. at 7.00 m. or 23 feet
tion that holds the ceiling board, otherwise.known as the nailing A combination of:
strip. The common size used are 1 x 2; 2 x 2; or 2 x 3 lumber 11 pc~. 2" X 2" X 14' and
spaced to suit the size of the ceiling board. In short, the ceiling 11 pcs. 2" x 2" x 10' or
board dimension dominates the spacing of the ceiling joist for 22 pcs, 2" x 2" x 12'
economy. The methods adopted in computing the quantity
is the same as that of the studs with the aid of Table 4-3 3. Order:
19 pcs. 2" x 2" x 14.' =88.66 bd. ft.
2" X 2"@ .40 m. O.C
22 pcs. 2" x 2" x 12'' =88.00 bd. ft.
176.66 bd. ft.
say 177 bd. ft.

Solution by the Area Method

4.00 m.
1. Area of the ceiling
t I
7.00 x 4.00 = 28 sq. m.

2. Referring to Table 4-3

28 x 6.417 = 179.7 say 180 bd. ft.

FIGURE 4-19 3. Note the 3 bd. ft .. negligible difference.

' 134
135
 Ii

SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE LUMBER

I 4-15 CEILING BOARD

There are numerous kinds of ceiling board of different

quality and dimensions used in building construction. The sim-
B. Ceiling Board

1. Find the area of the ceiling

4.00 m. x 5.00 m. = 20 sq. m.
plest way of finding the number of boards required is to di- 2. Referring to Table 4-4
vide the area of the ceiling by the effective covering area of each
board or by the square meter area method with the aid of Table
2
_fa .· = 6.9 say 7 pcs. 1.20 x 2.40 plywood
4-4 /

Illustration 4-12 TABLE 4-4 QUANTITY OF CEILING BOARD PER

SQUARE METER
A bedroom with a general dimension of 4.00 m. by 5.00
SIZES !EFFECTIVE COVERING NUMBER OF PIECES
meters specifies the use of 6 mm by L20 m. by 2.40 meters ;., rn. Sq.m. persq.m_. -
plywood for ceiling on a 2 x 2 ceiling joist spaced at .40 m. x
.60 m. o.c. Find the number of plywood and the board foot of .30 X .30 0.09 lhl 11
the ceiling joist required. .40· X .40 0.16 6.250
.40 X .6() 0.:?4 4.167
.60 X · .60 0.36 2.778
.80m. .60 x1.20 · 0.72 1.389
plywood __ , --l+--- .90 X 1.80 1.62 0:617
ceilinq 1.20 X 2.40 2.88 0.347
2.40 m

.80m. 11.lustratio n 4-13

--\ I 1.20 1 1.20 1 1.20' 1 1.20. I l-'- An office room with a general dimensions of 6.00 m. x
.10 m. .lOm.
9.60 meters specify the use of a .60 x 1.20 m. ceiling board. - '
I FIGURE 4-20 Find the number of pieces requ,ired.
~
Solution ,__....,_ _ _ _ _ 9.60 m, - - - - - - - -

A. Ceiling Joist

1. Find the area of the ceiling

T·
e
g
I
.60 x l.20 plywood ccilin9
7
I

m. <D
4.QQ m. X 5.QQ m. = 20 sq.

2. Referring to Table 4-3

l_• I I I I I I I I

Multiply:
20 x 5.445 = 108.90 say 109 bd. ft. FIGURE 4-2.1

136 137

l_
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCT.ION ESTIMATE LUMBER

1st Solution:_By the Effective Covering Area Method 1. That the quotient in dividing the area of the ceiling by
' the effective area covering of one board yields an exact
1. Find the area of the ceiling number or value (no fraction).
· 6.00 x 9.60 m. = 57.6 sq. m .
2. That the ceiling is plain and not interrupted by beams,
. 2. Referring to Table 4-4 using a .60 x 1.20 board girders, rafters, partitions, opening, etc.
57.6
80 pcs. 3. That the ceiling has no intricate design or dee.orations
.72
that requires cutting of the ceiling board.
2_nd Solution: By the Number of Pieces per Square Meter
When cutting of the ceiling boards ~ould not be avoided
l. Find the area• of the ceiling wastage is also inevitable but could be replenished by an
6.00 x 9.60 = 57.6 sq. m. allowance facto_r of about 2 to 5 percent.

Illustration 4-14
2. Referring to Table 4-4 using a .60 x 1.20 board
Multiply:
A living room measures 6.80 m. x 8.00 m. specify the
5 7 .6 x 1.389 = 80 pcs.
use of a .90 x 1.80 m. ceiling board. Find the number of pieces
required.

,
3rd Solution: By the Direct Counting Method
, I
25m .
1. Find the number of boards along the 6.00 m. '
6.00 = 10 pcs.
~
6 .30m .
.90 x i.aO ceiling board

2. Find the number of board along the 9.60 m.

9.60 B
1.20 = pcs. ...•25m.
--
.40m.
I-I.BO- ,-1.ao+1.ao- -1.ao- -i-
.40m.

3. Multiply results of 1 and 2

10 x 8 = 80 pcs. FIGURE 4-22

Comment:
1st Solution: B.y the Effective Covering Area Method
The result of the three methods as presented are correct and
satisfactory if the ceiling area falls under the following condi- 1. Find the area of the ceiling
tions: 6.80 x 8.00 = 54.40 sq. m.
\

139
138
 LUMBER
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

!n ordering lumber for door frame, the estimator has two

2. Referring to Table 4-4 using a .90 x 1.80 ceiling board options:
54.40
1. = 33.58 say 34 pcs. 1. Ordering one length of 18 ft. for each doo_r jamb or a
62
2. Combination of headers or jamb and header to suit the
commercial length of lumber for economic reasons.
2nd Solution: By the Number of Pieces per Sq. M.
Illustration 4-15
1. Find the area of the ceiling
6.80 x 8.00 = 54AO sq. m.
A school building has 20 classroom with 2 doors per room
2. Referring to Table 4-4 specify the use of .3" )-: 6',' c;loor jamb. Prepare an order list of
I
Multiply: lumber for fabrication of the door jamb.
54.40 x .617 = 33.56 say 34 pcs.
3 ft.

3rd Solution: By the Direct Counting Method Heilder~

1. Find the number of boards along the 6.80 m. side

6.80 = 3.78
1.80
7 fl

2. Find the number of boards along the 8.00 m. side

8.00
~ = 8.89

l/<-3"x6"
--1--1-_J_
3. Multiply 1 and 2
3.78 x 8.89. = 33.60 say 34 pcs. ~ 13--

FIGURE 4-23

Solution
4-16 DOOR FRAME
A. Ordering one length for each jamb
Estimating the materials for fabrication of door frame is
simply determining the size and length of the lumber to suit 1. Determine the total length of the jamb and header
th,e size of door panel whose width varies from .60 m. to 1.00 Jamb = (7' + 3") x ·2
meter wide. Door frame bigger than one meter opening is con- = 14' - 6" or 14.5 ft.
sidered as special design and order.

141
140
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE LUMBER

1. Due to the scarcity of lumber, those of length from 1.8

2 . Length of Header
(3 ft.+ 6 In.)= 3' - 6" or 3.5 ft. feet and above might not be available in the market and
this might cause delay of the construction work.
3. Total length = 18.0 ft.
2. The price of lumber usually varies and goes higher as
4. Order: 40 pcs. 3" x 6" x 18' = l,080 bd. ft. the length goes longer. The cost of the 90 board feet
difference between the two procedures might not
compensate with the difference in cost per bo~rd foot
B. Combination of Headers and Jambs
if shorter length is ordered.
1. One header is 3' - 6" or 3.5 ft.
In adjusting the ordered length from 14' - 6" to 16 feet
(see step 4) there is an excess length of 40 pcs. one and one ha.If
2. Four Headers = 14 feet
feet or 45 cm. which could be used on other parts of the cons-
truction or they could be sliced for studs or ceiling joist which
3. For 40 Headers
then ·could not be totally considered as waste.
Order: 10 pcs .. 3" x 6" x 14'

4. Jambs = (T' + 3") x 2 sides = 14' - 6"

or 14.5 ft.
4-17 WINDOW FRAME

5. Lumber length is even number for 40 jambs The different parts of a window frame to be considered
Order: 40 pcs. 3" x 6" x 16' in estimating are:

1. Jamb 3. Window Sill

6. Summary:
Header: 10 pcs. 3" x 6" x 14' = 210 bd. ft. 2. Header 4. Mullion
1

Jamb: 40 pcs. 3" x 6" x 16' = 960 bd. ft. 5. Transom

1,170 bd. ft.
Estimating. Procedure

Comment:
1. To find the length of the jamb, add the thickness of
the sill, the mullion and the header.
Comparing the .result of the two procedures, it _will be
noted that the second procedure is 90 board f,ee,t more than the 2. The length of-the sill and header shall include the thick-
result of the first one, considering the high cost of lumber now ness_ of the two jambs and the mullion.
a days, one has to choose the order of 40 pcs. at 18 ft. long.
However, · in ordering the length from 18 feet and above the 3. The transom is equal to the length of the sill or.header
following disadvantages might be encountered: less the thickness of the two jambs.
'
142 143
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

4. The length ,of the mull ion is equal to the length of the
chapter 5
jambs less the thickness of the Ihead and sill

lllustratio n 4-16

From Figure4-24 prepare the list of the lumber materials

to be ordered.

-
3"' 1--
Window Header - - ,
. _FORMS, SCAFFOLDING
Transom "7,

AND STAGING
ft. t- Jamb I-- Mulllon

~3-· x 6"" l 3" X 4" 5-1 FORM

_,___
-'--
I
3
.I. Window Sill _ . /

7 ft.
II
• 3·•
Form is a temporary boarding, sheating or pan used to pro-
.duce the desired shape and size of concrete. The structural
FIGURE 4-24 members of a building are built-up into its desired shape and di-
mension through the u·se of forms which ~erve as mou Id for the
mixed concrete.
Solution
Concrete mixture is generally semi-fluid that reproduces
L Jamb: (5' + 6") x 2 = ll'feet the shape of anything into which it is poured. Concrete forms
Order: 1 pc. 3".x 6" x 12 ft. should be water tight, strong enough and rigid to sustain the
weight of the concrete.' It should be simpje and economically
2. Heaeer & Sill: (7' + 6"} x 2 designed in such a manner that they are easily removed and re-
Order: 2 pcs. 3" x 6" x 8 ft. or assembled without damaged to themselves or to the concrete.
l pc. 3" x 6" x 16 ft.
Selection of forms are based from:
3. Mullions: (5' - O") x 2
Order: 1 pc. 3" x 4" x lO ft. 1.: Cost of the materials.
2. The construction and assembling cost.
4. Transom: (7' - O") 3. The number of times it could be used.
Order: 1 pc. 3" x 6" x 8 ft. 4. Strength and resistance to pressure and tear and wear,
'

144 145
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE FORMS, SCAFFOLDING.and STAGING

Classification of Forms: G. Types of Wall Form

1. Continuous
A. Materials 2. Full unit
i. Wood 3. Plastic 3. Layer unit
2. Metal 4. Composite a, Continuous
b. Sectional

B. Shape 5-2 GREASING· OF FORMS

1. Straight
2. Circular, etc. The _purpose of greasing the form is to make. the wood
water proof thus preventing the absorption of water in the
C. Solid or Hollow Cast concrete which causes swelling and warping. Greasing of forms
1. Single also .prevent adherence of concrete to the pores of the wood.
2. Double
Crude oil is the mo.st ec.onomical and satisfactory material
D. Methods of Construction for this purpose. The crude oil is mixed with No. 40 motor oil·
1. Ordinary to a proportion of 1:3 mixture with varying viscosity according
2. Unit to the temperature wherein thicker mixture _is necessary on
warm weather. Greasing of forms should not be done after the
steel bars have been set to its position.
E. Uses
1. Foundation and column
2. Wall
3. Steps 5-3 SCAFFOLDING AND STAGING
4. Beams and girders
I
5. Slabs Scaffolding is a temporary structure of wooden poles and
I
6. Sidewalks, etc. planks providing platform for working men to stand on while
~

erecting or repairing a building. It is further defined as a tempo-

F rary framework for other purposes. Staging is a more substantial
!- F. Construction of Forms consist of

~ 1. Retaining board ·framework progressively built up as tall building rises up. The
2. Supporters or studs term staging is applied because it is built up in stages one storey
r
I
3. Braces
4. Spacer
at a time.

5. TieWire Numerous accidents in building construction usually hap-

6. Bolts and nails pened because of faulty construction method and insufficient
'
147
146
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
FORMS,SCAFFOLDiNG and STAGING

supports and braces. One tragic incident that happened very

5-4 COMPARATIVE ANALYSIS BETWEEN THE T & G AND
recently at the Film Pl.ace in Metro Manila where several lives in- PLYWOOD AS FORMS
cluding the Supervising Engineer were burietl in cement and
rubbles when the forms and staging swayed and rammed down Cost is the primary consideration in selecting the kind of
in total collapse. materials to be used as form .. Cost is a broad term in construc-
tion which refers to the initial investment iri purchasing the
Staging is not as simple as others think of it. !t requires materials including the construction and assembling cost, the
special attention., training and e,<perienced men to do the work.
number of times it could be used and the durability of the ma-
Acco~d ingly, t~e primary cause of accidents and failure of the terial to resist pressure and tear and wear.
framework is brought about by the use of inferior quality lum-
ber, inadequate supports and braces, nails and others for ecOl'lo-
my sake. Definitely, out lumber has no place in s_caffoiding or
staging work if the builder is aware of the value of life and pro- Illustration 5-1
perty involved in building constructiion .. Lumber intended for
temporary structure to support heavy !oad such as concrete A residential house has 10 wooden posts resting on a con-
should be selected from straight grain of wood free from shakes crete footing as shown in Figure 5-2. Prepare a comparative
or knots and other defects. bill of materials using T & G and plywood forms .

The different parts of staging are:

1. Vertical support
2. Footing base (as need arises)
3. Horizontal braces .30 m.
T&G
4. Blocks and wedges support

1
5. Nails
~Mm

l5m Footing
.30 m.
1.20 m.

FIGURE 5-1
' FIGURE 5-2

148
149
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE FORMS, SCAFFOLDING and STAGING

Solution: Using T & G Board Form B

a) Using a 1" x 6" T & G Board

1. .60 x 8 pcs. = 4.80 or 16 ft.
2. For 5 forms
1. Solve for the lateral width of one footing.
Order:
(.30 X. 2) + (.40 X 2)
5 pcs. 2" x 2" x 16'
.6+ .. 8=1.40m.
c) Brace Holder and Stake
2. Referring to Table 4-1
1. By direct counting from the figure we have:
1.40 x 7.70 = 10.78 say 11 pcs.
4 pcs. 2" x 2" x 8'
I
3. For 10 posts prepare 5 forms only
Summary for Five Footings
11 x 5 = 55 pcs.
28 pcs. l" x 6" X' 8' T'& G Board = 112 bd. ft.
4. Determine the height of the form 9 pcs. 2" x 2" x 8' = · 72 In. ft.
'10 PCS. 2"· X 2" X 16' = 160 In. ft.
1.20 m. = 4 feet

5. Order: 2" x.2" Frame

Plywood
55 pcs. l" x 6" x 4' or
1
28 pcs. l" x 6" x 8' = 112 bd. ft.
··: Y117-
1.20 m .
b} Form Ribs or Frame@ AO m. distance _30 m.

■-===•• J-
Form A
•

~
L .30 x 8 pcs.
1.20 x 4 pcs. =
2.40 or 8 ft.
4.80 m. or 16 ft.
f---30 m.1 ·
~

2. For 5 forms
. 30 m. .40 m.
Order:
5 pcs. 2" x 2'.' x 8'
' 5 pcs. 2" x 2" x 16' FIGURE 5-3

150
ll51
I:
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATI= FORMS, SCAFFOLDING and STAGING

2nd Solution
Form B

1. By direct counting
a) Using plywood forms

1. The total lateral width of one form = L40m. 6 pcs. 2" x 2" x 1.20 m. (4 ft.)
2. length or Height of the form = 1.20 m. 4 pcs·. 2" x 2'' x.40 m.
3. Area of one form

1.40 x 1.20 = 1.68 sq. m. 2. For 5 forms, we get:

4. Total area of 5 forms 30 pcs. 2" x 2" x 4 ft.

20 pcs. 2" x 2" x .40 m.
1.68 x 5 = 8.40 sq. m.
3. Order:
5; Referring to Table 4-4 using 1.20 x 2.40 plywood
by effective covering.
15 pcs. 2" x ,2" x 8 ft.
Divide:
5 pcs. 2" x 2" x 1.60 or 6 ft.
8.40 ...,
_
2 88
= 2.92 say~ pcs. plywood
c) Brace Holder and Stake
b) Forms or Ribs
Form A 1. By direct counting

1. By direct counting 4 pcs. 2" x 2" x 8 ft.

6 pcs. 2" x 2" x 1.20 m (4 ft.)
Summary for 5 Footings
4 pcs. 2" x 2" x · .30 m. (1 ft.°)
·,
3 pcs. 6 mm x 1.20 x 2.40 plywood
2. For 5 forms, we get: 30 pcs. 2" x 2" x 8' = 240 In. ft.
30 pcs. 2" x 2" x 4 ft.
20 pcs. 2" x 2" x 1 ft.
_.,, 2 pas.
5 pcs.
2" x
2" x
2" x 10'
2" x 6'
= 20 In. ft.
= 30 In. ft.
290 In. ft.
3. Order:
From the above results, knowing the materials required for
15 pcs. 2" x 2" x 8 ft. T & G and piywood. form, canvass the prices and make your
2 pcs. 2" x 2'' x 10 ft. choice as to what materials will be used.

152
153
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE FORMS, SCAFFOLDING and STAGING

TABLE 5-1 QUANTITY OFT & G FORM FOR PIERS AND Solution
COLUMNS IN BOARD FOOT PER SQUARE METER
MATERIALS BD.FT'.OFT&G BD.FT.OF2x2 LN.FT. 1. Find the lateral surface area of one column
per sq. m. Frame per sq. m. per sq. m.
(.30 X 2) + (.40 X 2) X 4.00 m. ht.
l" x 4" T & G 18.33 7.32 21.96 (.6 +- .8) x 4.00 .m. = 5.6 sq. m.
1" x 6" T & G 17.50 7.32 21.96
2. Referring to Table 5-1 using l" x 6" T & G Board
Multiply:
Note: To convert Bd. Ft. to Linear Ft. multiply by 3.
To convert Linear Ft. to Bd. Ft. divide by 3. 5.6 X 17.50 98 bd. ft.

Illustration 5-2 3. For 8 columns

Multiply:
Prepare the Bill of Materials required for 8 columns at 4
meters high with a uniform cross sectional dimension of 30 cm. 98 x 8 = 784 bd. ft. 1" x 6" x 14'
x 40 cm. using 1" x 6" T & G form with 2 ' x 2" frame.
4. Find the 2" x 2" frame for one form
Referring to Table 5-1

2" x 2" F"~',

.30 m.11
~ i Multiply:

5.6 x 7.32 = 41 bd. ft.

0
0
E .40 m. 5. For 8 columns.
Multiply:

.,i I-
i..-t-------L- - T & G Form 41 x 8 = 328 bd. ft.
l--]b::z::::r:::±3:l....J --+--

+-.40m.--f Comments

1. Illustration 5-1 is the direct counting method, one will ·no-

tice the intricacies involved in itemizing·the materials for
the different parts of the form including the adjustment of
I· FIGURE 5~4 the lurnber to the commercial length for that simple

154
155
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
FORMS, SCAFFOLDING and STAGING

wooden footings. What if the estimate calls for the entire

forms necessary to construct a multi-st_orey reinforced con-
* The values given under the frame or ribs column are
crete building? Table 5-1 was prepared for this purpose
computed from a
longitudinal rib type considering its
economical advantages.
and presented in illustration 5-2.

Illustration 5-3.
2. The 2 x 2 frame as found in illustration 5-2 does not in-
clude yet the vertical and horizontal support and the diago~ i
nal braces which will be discussed later in Sect.ion 5-8 un-
der the scaffolding and staging.
j Six concrete posts of 4.00 m. high with a uniform cross
sectional dimension of 30 by 30 cm. specify the use of 12 mm
plywood on a 2" x 2" frame. Prepare the bill of materials.

5-5 FORMS USING PLYWOOD

'
--
~·ti
~I
Plywood is a versatile construction material not only used Plywood Form
-
I for walls, partitions and cabinets but also. for furnitures as well

.,.I
as forms for reinforced concrete construction. The plywood
thickness varies from 4 mm., 6 mm., 12 mm. and 20 mm. with
t---40 m.1
I"' a commercial size of .90 x 1.80 m. and 1.20 m. x 2.40 me-
~. ters. Plywood as form has the following advantages: ·c::-:_:.-.-·•.~1,
~- ·

i·.':.-. ,)/
.30 m.

_l
~\
~II l. It is economical as to labor cost ~ - 2" x 2" Frame
....., 2. Light weight and handy
~ 3. Smooth surface which requires less plaster or no plas-
tering at all
-wg:-:_::::5\
t, ::;\}:i. .
,., .. ·' · '· .30m
4. Less consumption of nails
....
...
'
.30 m.

.40m.
--
.30 m.
TABLE 5-2 QUANTITY OF PLYWOOD FORM A~D ITS
FRAMEFORCOLUMNSPERSQ.M.LATERALAREA FIGURE 5-5
PLYWOOD NO.OF FRAME OR RIBS* IN BO.FT.PER SQ.M.
, Solution
size ir.i" m. PCS. 2 X 2 2 X 3
Data:
Number of Post = 6
.90 X l ,8U .842 12.71 18.96
Height = 4 meters
1.20 2.40 .488 12.71 18.96
X Cross Sectional Dimension- = -30 x 30 cm.
Frame = 2" X 2"

156 157
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMA"fE FORMS, SCAFFOLDING and STAGING

· l. Solve for the lateral surface area of one column. as form for a cylindrical column, wood board and built up sup:
porters are necessary to form the ckcumferential arc frame.
.30 x 4 sides = 1.20 m. The standard dimension of the plain G. I. sheet is .90 m. wide
by 2.40 met{!rs long.

2. Multiply by the height. Estimating procedure:

I

1.20 x 4.00 m. = 4.8 sq. m. 1. Find the circumference of the circle

3. Total area for 6 columns where C = 3.1416 x diameter

I
4.8 x 6 ·= 28.8 sq. m. 2 .. Multiply the circumference by the column height.
3. Divide the result found in step 2 by 2.16, the .effective
4. Referring to Table 5-2 using 1.20 x 2.40 plywood covering area of one G. I. sheet.
Multiply: 4. Where extra cuts could not be avoided, an allowance of
5 to 10% for waste' is satisfactory.
28.8 x .488 = 14 pcs. 5. Solve for the number of supporter or ribs, divide the
circumference by .10 if the spacing is 4" or by .15 if
5. Solve for the frame, from Table 5-2 using 2 x 2 lum- the spacing is 6 inches.
ber; 6. Provide 2 pieces circumferential supporter for every
Multiply: joint of the unit form which is equivalent to 90 cm. the
28.8 x 12.71 = 366 bd. ft. width of one G. I. sheet.

6. The height of the post is t.he length of the frame --------,.,1" Wood Board
Order: Circumferential
·supporte,·

366 bd. ft. 2" x 2" x 14 ft. :.0\

1 ,17' 2" x 2" Vertical
b~
I Frame
5-6 FORMS OF CIRCULAR COLUMN I
\ ~//
The ga Ivan ized Iron sheet otherwise known as G. I. sheet
7./
is the rnost common material u.sed as form for circular,, oval or ··•;;_;_;-✓
·6:.,
eleptical structure considering its versatility in forming any
curve of various shapes and design. Where G. I. sheet is specified
FIGURE 5-6

158 159
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
FORMS, SCAFFOLDING and STAGING

Illustration 5 - 4
7. Solve for the 2" x 2" frame of one column @ .10 m.
o.c.
Determine the required G. I. sheet form for 6 circular co- 1.88
lumns at 4.50 m. high with a uniform cross-sectional diameter .10 18.8 say 19 pcs.
of .60 m. using 1" x 14" and 2" s x 2" supporters.
8. For 6 columns

19 x 6 = 114 pcs.
Solution
9. Height of the column is 4.50 m. or 16 ft.
1. Solve for the circumference of one column Therefore, the order will be:

C = 3.1416 x .60 = 1.88 m. 114 pcs. 2" x 2" x 16' 608 bd. ft.

2. Multiply by the column height 10. Circumferential arc supporter

Area = 1.88 x 4.50 = 8.46 sq. m. 4.50 m. ht .

.90
= 5 pcs.

3. Area of the 6 columns

11. Multiply by 2
8.46 x 6 = 50.76 sq. m.
5 x 2 = 10 pcs.
4. Find the number of sheets required, divide by the
effect iv~ co\tering of one G. I. sheet = 2.16 The value. of 2 is the circumferential supporter
frame per G. I. sheet form at 90 cm. high having 2 frames
per joint (see figure 5-7)
50.76
2.16
= 23.5 pcs.
12. Total for 6 columns
5. Consider 10% allowable factor
10· x 6 = 60 pcs. l" x 14" x 5' or
23.5 X 1.10 ·,= 25.85 30 pcs. l" x 14" x 10' = 350 bd. ft.
I

Note: The diameter of the circular column is .60 m. or

r:,_ Total
•,
G. I. sheets
2, ft. hence, a 5 ft. board divided into two will
,. b~ satisfactory for, the circumferential arc. (See
!• I = 25.85 say 26 pcs. Figure 5-7).

160
161
k
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
FORMS, SCAFFOLDING and STAGING

Summarv
Illustration 5-5
26 pcs. ..90 x 2.40 m. plain G. I. sheet
114 pcs. 2" x 2" x 16' Solving the problem of illustration 5-4 using Table 5-3, we
30 pcs. l" x 14" x 10' have the following data: '

Number of columns 6 pcs .

Height 4.50 m.
Plain G. I. Sheet
Diameter .60m.
Lumber Ix 14 and 2 x 2
2 x 2 Supporters Circumference = 1.88 m.

d = .60 m.
Solution

CIRCULAR COLUMN FORM

l. Find the Lateral surface area of the 6 circular columns

FIGURE 5-7
1.88 x 4.50 m. x 6 columns

TABLE 5-3 QUANTITY OF LUMBER FORM FOR •- 50.76 sq. m.

CIRCULAR COLUMN

LUMBER BOARD FOOT PER PLAIN G.1.SHEET 2. Divide by the effective covering area of one G. I. sheet
SIZE
SPACING OF FRAME
_ 10 cm. 12.5 cm. 15 cm. 20 cm. 50.76 = 23.50 pcs.
2.16
1" X 2" 11.70 10.00 8.50 6.50
3. Consider 10% for allowance
2" X 2" 23.39 20.00 17.00 13.00
,, 23.22 x 1.10 = 25.54 say 26 pcs.
2" X 3" 35.08 30.00 · 25.50 19.50
,,
1,
1" X 8" 7.70 7.70 7.70 7.70 4. Solving for the supporter frame or ribs @ .10 m. o.c.
\

I'
From Table 5-~
"' 1" x 1O" 9.62 9.62 9.62 9.62
Multiply:
1'" X 12" 11.54 11.54 11.54 11.54

1" X 14" 13.47 13.47 13.47 13.47 26 x 23.39 = 608 bd. ft.

162 - 163

L
 FORMS, SCAFFOLDING and STAGING
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

Solution
5. Circumferential supporter, using 1" x 14" board
From Table 5-3 1. Find the length of'the two sides (depth) and bottom at
Multiply: the beam.

26 x 13.47 = 350 bd. ft. (.40 X 2) + .30 = 1.10 m.

TABLE 5-4 FORM FOR BEAMS AND GIRDERS 2. Multiply by the clear span

PLYWOOD NUMBER 1 lUMBER FRAME BO. FT. PER PLYWOOD 1.10 x 4.50 = 4.95 sq. m.
SIZE Per Sq. m. 1 X 2 : 2 X 2 : 2 X 3
.90 X 1.80 .81 8.0 16.0 24.0 3. Solving for the plywood form, from Table 5-4
Multiply:
1.20 X 2.40 .42 16.0 32.0 48.0
4.95 x .42 = 2.1 pcs.

4. Lumber frame or ribs, from Table 5-4

III ustration 5~7 Multiply:

Six concrete beams with a cross-sectional dimension of .30 2.1 pcs. x 32.0 = 64 67.2 bd. ft.
x .40 m. has a uniform clear span of 4.50 m. specify the use
of 6 mm. x 1.20 x 2.40 plywood forms on a 2 x 2 wood
frame. Prepare the bill of materials. Summary for 6 Beams

12 pcs. 6 mm. x 1:20 x 2.40 m. plywood

-- - - 384 bd. ft. "2" x 2" x 16' lumber

V .3om. -t 5-7 ESTIMATING SCAFFOLDING AND STAGING

- Plywood Form
~
I
.40 m.
E Estimating the quantity of the materials needed for scaf-
0
L!)
folding or staging is somewhat difficult considering the volume.
r• •I
""
, ,,• , .m, / ~<Om-+-+
i I of the materials involved. The computation requires time and

\.
-- FIGURE 5-8
rich imagination of the estimator in determining the vertical and
horizontal support ihcluding the diagonal braces, the blocks and
the wedges which are not shown even on a detailed plan of the
building.

164 165
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
FORMS, SCAFFOLDING and STAGING

Complicating as such, no one would be crazy enough to be

painstakingly counting every parts of the staging in order to be
commended for obtaining an accurate estimate of the lumber 2 x 2 Horizontal
required, except maybe the author of the Simplified Construc- and diagonal brace
tion Estimate. The usual practice of most estimator is to make a
guessing estimate of either the quantity of the materials or by
lump sum amount for forms and staging item of the construc-
tion. This will not give one a peace of mind but worries and
sleepless night especially when the construction is under straight
contract.
. 2 x 3 vertical support
TABLE 5-5 QUANTITY OF LUMBER FOR SCAFFOLDING
OR STAGING SCAFFOLDING

LUMBER COLUMN BEAM FLOORING

SIZE BD. FT. PER METER HT. BD. FT./ M. LGTH. BD. FT. / SQ. M.

Vertical Hor, Brace : Vert, Hor,

- FIGURE 5-9
SUPPORT
,
Solution
• 2" x 2" 4.67 21.00 11.67 4.00 4.67 6.10

2''. X 3" 7.00 31.67 17.50 6.00 7.00 9.10 A. Staging for Columns
2" X 4". 9.33 42.22 23.33 8.00 9.33 12.10
-1. Find the total length of the 9 columns
j 4.00m.x9 = 36m.
I.. ! llusfration 5-7
i,o
:,.
"" A reinforced concrete building has 9 columns with a clear 2. Using 2" x 3" vertical support from Table 5-5
r"' height of 4.00 meters ·as shown on Figure 5-9. Determine the re" Multiply:
p quired staging under the following specifications:
36 x 7.00 = 252 bd. ft.

Verticai Support use 2" x 3" lumber

Horizontal Support use 2" x 2" lumber If the height is 4.00 m. order
Diagonal Braces use 2" x 2" lumber
252 ba. ft. 2" x 3" x 14 ft.
166 .

167
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
FORMS, SCAFFOLDING and STAGING

3. Horizontal Support: From Table 5-5 using 2 x 2

Multiply: b) Horizontal Support using 2" x 2"
Multiply:
36 x 21.00 = 756 bd. ft.
51 x 4.67 = 238 bd. ft ..
4. Diagonal Braces: From Table 5-5
c) Total:
Multiply:
306 bd. ft. 2" X 3" X 14 ft.
36 X 11.67 = 420 bd. ft.
238 bd: ft. 2" x 2" x 14 ft.
5. Total:
C. Staging fa~ Concrete Floor Slab
252 bd. ft. 2" x 3" x 14 ft.
1,176 bd. ft. 2" x 2" x 16 ft. 1. Find the area df the floor

Note: If 2" x 2" is computed in linear ft.

Multiply by 3 thus:
4.50 x 4'.00 x 4 units = 72 sq. m .
2. Referring to Table 5-5 using 2" x · 3"
1,176 x 3 = 3,528 In. ft. Multiply:

B. St-aging fof Beams .72 x 9.10 = 655 bd. ft.

1. Find the total length of the beams 3. Order:

(4.50 X 6) + (4.00 X 6) 655 bd. ft. 2" x 3" x 14'

27 + 24 = 51 meters
Comment:
2. Referring to Table 5-5
In the construction of multi-storey building, the trans-
a} Vertical Support using 2" x 3' fer of the forms and scaffolding or staging from one floor
Multiply: to the next flooris an inevitable normal operation wherein
waste of materials could not be avoided due to tear and
51 x 6.00 = 306 bd. ft. wear. The percentage of. waste varies depending upon
the following factors.

168

169
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

1. The difference in height between the 1st and the

chapter 6
2nd floor naturaliy requires adjustment .of the vertical
support.

2·. The difference in size of the beams and girders also

requires adjustment of the forms. ROOFING MATERIALS
3. The tear and wear of the forms and scaffolding
are caused by dismantling, transfering and re-assembling. 6-1 Gal.vanized Iron Sheet

4. Wreckless use and handling of the materials inclu- Galvanized iron sheet is either Plain or .Corrugated. The
ding firewood and pilferages during the progress of the Plain G.,I. Sheet is commonly used for roofing, gutter, flushing,
work.
downspout, ridge roll, valley and hip roll etc. with a standar~
commercial size of :fillm. wide by 2.49 ~eters long. The Corru-
The use of lumber classified as form lumber of inferior gated G. I. Sheet on the otherhand, is widely used for rnofing
quality will only result to a high percentage waste and risk. The material having standard width of,.80 meter with varying length
use of inferior quality lumber or forms and staging for econo- from L50 meters to 3.60 meters at an iqterval length of 30 cen ·
timeter_s.
mic reason should be discourage because the final accounting
result will show that such idea is more expensive contrary to
what is expected.

As. previously mentioned the percentage of waste in trans-

fering the staging from one- floor to the next floor varies from
5 to 10% depending upon the phy_sical condition of the str·uc-

~r~~~
ture, the quality of materials and the manner of how the ma- .
terials are handled.

FIGURE 6-1

170 171
L
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE ROOFING MATERIALS

21/a corr.
The thickne~s of the galvanized iron sheets are measured
in terms of Gauge from number 14 to 30 wherein the sheet be- G. I.Sheet ""\
comes thinner as the gauge number increases. Gauge number 26
is the most extensively used although gauge 24 is sometimes
specifjed by those who could afford the cost. 11/• corr.
END LAPPING
SIDE LAPPING
How to distinguish the difference in thickness of the G.I.
sheets between the consecutive gauges from 14 to 30 is diffi-
cult to determine even with the aid of a caliper. The gauge is / TABLE 6-1 STANDARD WEIGHT OF GALVANIZED IRON
SHEET IN .KILOGRAM
expressed in terms of hundreth of a centimeter and the only
way by which ·one could be sure that he is buying the right
. thkkn}~ss of the G. I. sheet is through the weight measure per Gauge Thick 1.50 m. 1.80 m. 2.10 m. 2.40 m. 2.70 m. 3.00 m. 3.30m. 3.60 m.
No. _ness (5') (6') (7') (8') (9') (1 O') (11 ') (12')
sheet according to its length as presented in Table 6-1. in cm.

. 14 .203 22.36 26.83 31.30 35.78 40.25 44.72 49.19 53.66

The important factors to be considered in estimating cor- 15 .180 20.25 24'.30 28.35 32.40 36.45 40~0 44.55 48~0
rugated G. I. sheets are: 16 .163 18.41 21.76 25.39 29.02 32.64 36.27 39.90 43.52

of the side lapping if it is ½_ 17 .147 16.43 19.72 23.00 26.29 29.58 32.86 36.15 39.43
1. Verify the specifications
18 .132 14.73 17.67 20.62 23.56 26.51 29.45 32.40 35.34
or 2½ corrugations.
19 .117 13.03 15.63 18.24 20.84 23.45 26.05 28.66 31.26
2. If it is 1½ corrugations the effective width covering per · 20 .102 11.32 13.58. 15.85 18.11 20.38 22.64 24.90 27.17
s_heet is .70 m. or .60 in. for 2½ corrugations. '10.43
21. .094 12.52 14.60 16.69 18. 78 20.86 22.95 25.03

J 3. The standard end lapping joint is from 25 cm. to 30 cm. 22 .086 9.62 11.54 13.46 15.38 17.31 19.23 21.lS 23.08
,. 23 .079 8.73 10.47 12.22 13.96 15.71 17.45 19.20 20.94
. 4. The distances between the purlins should be proportion- 24 .071 7.91. 9.49 11.07 12.66 14.24 15.82 17.40 l 8.98
~ ally spaced and adjusted to the length of the G.I sheets to
~ 25 ,064 7.03 8.43 9.84 11.24 12.65 14.05 15.45 16.86
avoid unnecessary cutting cit the roofing sheets.
r In short, the length of the roofing sheet governs the dis-
26 .056
I
6.19 7.42
I
8.66 9.90 11.14 12.38 13.61 14.85

tances or spacing of the purlins. Refer to Table 6-2. 27 .051 5.76 . 6.91 8.06 9.21 l 0.36 1 1.51 12.66 13.81

2~ .048 5.33 6.39 7.46 8.52 9.59 10.65 11. 72 12. 78

1

5. As much as possible, minimize the end-lapping joint of the • .043 4.90 5.88 6.86 7.84 8.82 9.80 10.78 11.76
G. I. sheets, always specify longer length for economic
30 .041 4.48 5.37 6.27 7.16 8.06 8.95 9.85 10.74
reason.
173
172 "'
 ROOFING MATERIALS
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

5. Determine i:he number of G.I. nails or rivets and

washers in kilogram using Table 6-2 and Table 6-3.
TABLE 6-2 EFFECTIVE COVERING OF CORRUGATED G.I. SHEETS,
N Q .. OF NAILS & RIVETS PER SHEET AND SPACING OF PU RUNS 6. The number of anchor G.I. strap is the same as the
NO.OF MAILS quantity of the rivets. The G.I. washer is double the quantity of
EFFECTIVE WIDTH COVERING DISTANCE OF
LENGTH
SlDE LAPPING PURLINS OR RIVETS the rivets
.,, (see Table 6-3) .
in per sheet
Meter 1½ Corr. 2½ Corr. i11 m.
Feet
7. Solve for the number of plain G.l.sheets required for
.60 .75 14
6 1.80 .,_70 anchor strap with the aid of Table 6-4.
.60 .60 18
7 2.10 .70
TABLE 6-3 QUANTITY OF ROOF ACCESSORIES IN KIL.O
.60 .70 18
8 2.40 .70 MATERIALS NUMBER OF PIECES PER KILO
.60 .60 22
9 2.70 .70
I
.60 .67 22 G. I. Roofing Nails 120
10 3.00 r70
.60 .66 26 G. I. Rivets 180
12 3.60 .70
G. I; Washers 126
Lead Washers 75
Procedures in estimating the quantity o'f corrugated GJ. Umbrella Nail 120
roofing and its accessories.

1. Determine the length of the purlins along _the gutter TABLE 6-4 SIZE AND QUANTITY OF G.I. ANCHOR STRAP
IN ONE PLAIN G.1.SHEET
line.
NO.OF STRAP
SIZE OF PURLINS SIZE OF G.I.STRAP IN ONE PLAIN
2.
Divide this length by the effective width covering of
mm. ill. ill cm. G.1.SHEET
one sheet which is .70 m. for l½ corrugations or .60 m. for
2½ corrugations (See Table 6-2) the result is the number of G.I.
50 X 75 . 2 X 3 2.5 X 22.5 384
sheets in one row.
►
I
Determine the length of the rafter or the top' chord
3. 50 X 100 2 X 4 2.5 X 25.Q 342
then select the right combination of G.I. roofing sheets that will so· x 12.s 2 X 5 2.5 X 27.5 312
satisfy th is length considering the 30 cm. end lapping joint.
50 x 150 r 2 x s 2,5 X 30.0 288
1
1
, • 4. Multiply the result f<;>und in step 2 by each length of
G;I. sheet combination found in step 3.
'.L
175

i 174
l
 -SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
ROOFING MATERIALS

Illustration 6-1
2. The length of the rafter is 6.00 .m. A combination
of 3.60 m. and 2.70 m. long G,-1. sheets
From Figu1·e 6-2, find the number of corrugated G. I.
sheets and its accessories required if the side lapping specify 1½ 3. Order:
con·ugations with 30.cm. end lapping on a 50 x 75 mm. purlins.
20 pcs. .80 x 3.60 m. G.I. Sheets
20 pcs. .80 x 2. 70 m. G. I. Sheets

B. Rivets

1. • Referring to Table 6-2 for a 3.60 m. and 2. 70 m.

Corr. G. I. Roofing sheet

.::,..,,,,<.:Jo tri,
-~ Multiply:

For 3.60 m. long: 20 pcs. x 26 = 520 pcs.

For 2.70 m. long: 20 pcs. x 22 = 440 pcs.
Total = 960 pcs.

2. Convert to kilograms, from Table 6-3

FIGURE 6-2 Divide:
960
. 180 = 5.33 say 5.5 kg.

Solution

C. G.I. Washers
A. For Corrugated G.I. Sheets
1. Double the number of rivets'·
1. Divide the length of the gutter by the effective co-
vering of one sheet, referring to Table 6-2.
960 x 2 = 1,920 pcs.
Divide:
2. Convert to kilograms, referring to Table 6-3

14.00 m .
= 20 pcs. 1,920
. 70m. 15.24 say 15.5 kg.
126

176
177 I
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE '
ROOFING MATERIALS

D. Plain G.I. Strap on 50 x. 75 mm purlins

1. Total number of rivets = 960 pcs.

Corr
~ -G.t
~--..,,..___ · Ro-•·
2. Referring to Table 6-4 using 50 x 75 mm. purlins

i,
Divide:
960
384
= 2.5 pcs. Plain G.I. Sheets
...
-;- _::::.-~:-~

~-
- - ~ ( ' : - -~

~
'\\)

<_<;--·
!o\)
E. Lead Washers Gutt ----------- ':>·
er l. ''7e
. ----------- ./
i,. 1. The number of Rivets is equal the number of lead
~ washers = 960 pcs.
FIGURE 6-3
~ 2. Referring to Table 6-3
Divide:

.,, ·960
75
= 12.8 say 13 kg. Solution
""'
~ A. Corrugated G. I. Sheets

~
Summary
1. Referring to Table 6-2
20 pcs. 80 cm. x 360 cm. Corr. G.I. sheets Divide:
20 pcs. 80 cm. x 270 cm. Corr. G.I. sheets
l. 5.5 kg. G.I. Rivets 18.00 m .
... l?.5 kg. G.I. Washers .60m. = 30 pcs.
.
~ 13 kg. Lead Washers
2.5 pcs. Plain G.I. sheets
""r- 2. The length of the rafter is 6.00 m. or a combina-
tion of 3.60 and 2.70 m. sheets with 30 meter end
""

'
lapping {See Table 6-5).
illustration 6-2
j.a
3. Multiply each sheet length by the result of step 1
From Figure 6-3 find the number of corrugated G.I. sheet,
1
and the ~mb(e!la nails required i~ th 7 ~.I. sheets are laid at 2 /2! 30 pcs. - .so·m. x 3.60 m. Corr. G.I. Sheets
corrugations wrth .30 m. end lapping Joint. • · !; 30 pcs. - .80 m. x 2.70 m. Corr. G.I. Sheets

178 179
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE ROOFING MATERIALS

B. Umbrella Nails Solution

1. Referring to Table 6-2, ~etermine the number of A. Corrugated G.I. Roofing

nails for the 3.60 m. and 2.70 m. sheets.
1. Referring to Table 6-2
30 sheets x 26 = 780 pcs. Divide:
30 sheets x 22 = 660 pcs.
Total 1,440 pcs. 12,90 m.
_70 m. = 18.43 pcs.
2. Solve for the umbrella nail in kilogram S.
Referring to Table 6-3 2. Determine the length of the rafters (see Figure-6-4)

1,440 4.8 m. or 16 ft.

120 = 12 kg.
3. '\~
Referring to Table 6-5, 4.80 m. rafter requires a
Illustration 6-3
combination bf 3.00 m: ar:id 2.10 m. G.I. sheets
From Figure 6-4, find the number of corrugated G.I.
sheets, ~oaf nails, washers and lead washers required if the side
4. Therefore: I,
lapping specify l1/:i corrugations.

18.43 x 2 = 36.86 say 37 pcs. @3.00 m. long

18.43 x 2 = 36.86 say 37 pcs. @2.10 m._ long

B. Roof Nails

1. Referring to Table 6-2

For a 3.00 sheet: 37 x 22 = 814 pcs.

For a 2.10 sheet: 37 X 18 = 666 pcs.
Total 1,480 pcs.

2. Refer~ing to Table _6-3

G.I. Roof Nalls: 1,480
FIGURE 6-4 120 = 12.33 say 13 kg.

180
181
 C

SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

ROOFING MATERIALS

G.I. Washers: 1.480

126
= 11.75 say 12 kg.
Illustration 6-4

Lead Washers: 1,480

75
= 19.73 say 20 kg. From Figure 6-5, determine the number of corrugated G.I.
sheets, rivets, wa,shers, iead washers and the plain G.I. strap re-
TA.BLE 6-5 COMBINATION OF CORRUGATED G.I. SHEETS ON A GIVEN quired at 2½ side lapping corrugations on a 50 x 100 mm pu1-
RAFTER LENGTH lins.

LENGTH OF NO.OF
RAFTERS COMBINATION OF LENGTH
.
SHEETS
iri meter meter {ft.) a~d· mete,· {ft,)

3.00 1 3.00 "(10')

3.30 1 3.30 (11')
3.60 1 3.60 (12')
3.90 2 2.10 ( 7') and 2.10 ( 7')
,,,,
4.20 2 2.40 ( 8') and 2.10 ( 7')
4.50 2 2.40 ( 8') and 2.40 ( 8')
4.80 2 3.00 (lO'j and 2.10 ( 7')
5.10 2 3.00 (10') and 2.40 ( 8')
5.40 2 3.00 (10') and 2.70 ( 9')
\..- GJ)O m.
5.70 2 3.00 (10') and 3.00 (10') FIGURE 6-5
6.00 2 3.60 (12') and 2.70 ( 9')
Solution
6.30 2 3.60 (12') and 3.00 (10')
6.60 2 3.60 (12') _ and 3.10 (11') A. Corrugated G. I. Sheets
6.90 I
2 3.60 (.12') and 3.60 (1 ?'l
7.20 3 3.00 (10') and 2.40 ( 8' and 2.40 1. Referring to Table 6-2 for 2½. corrugation effec-
7.50 3 3.00 (10') and 3.00 (JO') and 2.1 0 ( 7') tive covering is .60 m.
7.80 3 3.00 (10')
Divide:
and 3.00- (1 O') and 2.40 ( 8')
8.10 3 3.60 (12') and 3.00 (10') and 2.TO ( 7')
34.50
8.40 3 3.60 (12') and 3.00 (10') and 2.4ci ( 8')
.6-0 = 57.50 pcs .
, 8.70 3 3.60 (12') and 3.60 (12') and 2.10 ( 7')
9.00
18.00 ~
3 3.60 (12') and 3.60 (12') and 2.40 ( 8')
= 30 pcs .
.60

182

183
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
'ROOFING MATERIALS

2. Length of Top Chord or rafter, Table 6-5 C. Plain G.I. Strap

For 6.00 m. = 3.60 and 2.70 m. sheets 1. Size of G.I. straps on a 50 x 100 mm. purlins
For 5.40 m. = 3.00 and 2.70 m.
sheets
= 2.5 by 25 cm.

2. Number of strap is equal to number of rivets

3. Determine the number of G.I. she~ts
= 8,160 pcs.
For 3,60m. sheet: 57.50 x 2-rull =115 pcs. (12'.)
For 2.70 m. sheet: 57.50 x 2 run= 115 pcs. ( 9') 3. Solve for the number of plain G.I. sheets
For 3.00 m. sheet: 30 x 2 run= 60 pcs. (10') Referring to Table 6-4
For 2.70 m. sheet: 30 x 2 run= 60 pcs. ( 9')
8,160
B. G.I. Rivets: 342 = 23.86 say 24 pcs.
Referring to Table 6-2

L For the 3.60 m. sheet: 115 x 26 = 2,990 pcs.

4. Common wire nails for the anchor straps
For the 3.00 m. sheet: 60 x 22 = 1,320 pcs.
For the 2.70 m. sheet: 175 x 22 = 3,850 pcs. /' 8,160 x 3 nails per strap
Total = 8,160 pcs.
= 24,480 pcs. 32 mm. CW Nail
2. Referring to Table 6-3
Note:
a) Rivets: 8,160 1 kilo of 4d, 32 mm CW Nail is Approx.
= 45.3 say 46 kg.
180 695 pcs.

b) G.I. Washers (Double the Rivets) Table 6-3 24,480 '

695
= 35.2 say 36 kg.
8,160 X 2
126
= 129.52 say 130 kg.
D. Ridge Roll, Fascia and Gutter to be discussed later in a
separate topic.
c) Lead Washers:
Summary
8,160
= 108.8 say 109 kg. .115 pcs . . 80 m. x 3.60 m. Corr. G.i. Sheets
75 175 pcs. .80 m. x 2.70 m. Corr. G.I. Sheets

184
185
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE ROOFING MATERIALS

60 pcs. .80 m. x 3.00 m. Corr. G.I. Sheets The primary consideration in tinsmithing job is economy
46 kgs. G.I. rivets which simply mean 'To utilize every inch of the tinsheet." Any
130 kgs. G. I. washers unnecessary or unwise cutting of the tinsheet as much as possi-
109 kgs. Lead washers bie should be avoided. Cutting shall start from the widest to the
24 pcs. .90 m. x 2.40 m. Plain G.I. sheets _narrowest part of the roof accessories. Experienced tinsmith
36 kgs. 4d, 38 mm. 32 mm. CW Nail start cutting from the gutter, then flashing dovvn to the smallest
p!ain G .I. strap thereby eliminating waste.

Comments Estimating procedure

The estimating procedure for a hipped-roof is the

1. Solve for the total length of the gutter.
same as that of the lean-to or gable type roofing, conside-
2. Divide this length by 2.35 m. to find the number of
. ring the effective covering of one sheet to be constant. gutter required.
However, a little variation might occur in actual construc-
3. Find the total width of one gutter.
tion under the following conditions: 4. Divide .90 m. by the result of step 3 to find how
-, many gutters could ·be made out from one plain G.I. sheet.
The. fractional value shall be reserved for other parts.
1. If the hipped roof is not patterned at 45 ° extra 5. Divide the result of step 2 by the result of step 4.
cutting of the G.I. roofing is inevitable. The result is the required number of plain G.l.sheets.

34.50 m.
2. Errors might be cortimitted in cutting and or
lapping of the corrugated G.I. sheets. -..J

Under these circumstances, an allowance of 2 to 5% will

be satisfactory. E
0
'1:
,, in
. N

!
I
GUTTER FLUSHING, RIDGE, HIPPED AND VALLEY ROLL
l 7.50 m.
20 cm.
Estimating for these kind of roof-accessories is simply de-
termining the number of plain G.1.sheets needed to moul~ or CROSS SECTION OF GUTTER
['. fabricate the gutter, flushing and the different rolls according to 7.5 cm.
I-r
I
the shape as shown in the plan. In building construction, this FIGURE 6~6
I type of work is classified onder the tinsmith ing work.
~ 186 187
l
 ROOFING MATERIALS
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

which is .55 m. the result is 1.64 pieces. This simply mean that
Illustration 6-5
only one gutter could be taken from one plain G.I. sheet with
an excess cut of .64 or equivalent of .35 meter.
Reproducing Figure 6-5 of illustration 6-4, find the num- .
ber of plain G.I. sheets required to fabricate the gutter as illus The .35 m. excess does not necessarily mea'n to be con-
trated. s.idered as totally waste because there are parts in the tinsm i-
thing work wherein such dimension could be used such as.
' flushing, downspout, strap, etc.
I Solution
I
I

1. Find the total length of the gutters Illustration 6-6

I
[,
34.50 + 27.00 +. 2(7.50) + 18 + 25.50 = 120 m. From Figure 6-7, find the number of plain G.I. sheets
r·
II"!
(e.quired for gutter and flushing.
2. Divide the length by 2.35
.,;,
·~.
I
120
51 pcs.
r·
I
2.35
~·
3. Total width of one gutter = 55 cm.
2.5 cm.
4. Divide! 22.5 crn. ..--- 5cm.;\J
5 crri. ~
2.5 cm ..
.90 2.S crn ------ 15 crn.
= 1.64 pcs. accept 1.0 15-cm.
.55m . Gutter
''1 Flash mg 7.5 cm.
~
The fractional value of .64 will be reserved momenta- ,
rily. FIGURE 6-7

5. Divide:
~ = 51 pcs. plain G.I. sheets
1.0 A. Gutter

Comment
1. Find the total length of the gutter
ICwill be noted that the width of one plain G.I. sheet is:
.90 meter, dividil)g this width by the total width of one gutter\
Frorn ihe figure = 20 meters
I ~.

189
188
 ROOFING MATERIALS
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

2. Divide by 2.35 rn. length of one gutter 4. Divide the result of 2 by step· 3

20 8.0
8.5 pcs. = 4 pcs.
2.35 2

3. Determine the total widfu of one gutter Summary

From the Fig1,Jre = .45 m. For Gutter: 5 pc;s. - .90 m. x 2:40 m. plain G.I. sheets,
For Flashing 4 pcs. - .90 m. x 2.40 m_ plain G-:1. sheets
4. Di;vide the width of the plain G.I. sheet Total : 9 pcs. Plain G.I. Sheets

_.:22_ = 2 pcs. Gutter per sheet

.45 C. Ridge, Valley and Hipped Rolls

5. Divide the result of step 2 by the result of step 4 The estimating procedure is the same as that of the
gutter and the flashing.
85 = 4.25 say 5 pcs .
2
TABLE 6-6 ROOF ACCESSORIES

ITEM EFFECTIVE LENGTH IN METER

8. Flashing

1. Determine the total length: Gutter 2.35

From the Figure: L=l8 m. Flashing 2.30

Ridge Roll 2.20

2, Find the number of flashing
Valley. Roll 2.35
18m.
7 .8 say 8 pcs. • Hipped Roll 2.20
2.30
· Soldering Lead ¼ bar per soldering joint
3. Width of the flashing = .45 m .
Muriatic Acid 10 cc per soldering lead
.90m .
.45 _ = 2 pcs. per G.I. sheet
'1,-

191
190
I

\'
 SIMPUFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
ROOFING MATERIALS

TABLE 6 - 7 CORRUGATED PLASTIC ROOFING SHEET Illustration 6-7

COMMERCIAL SIZE IN EFF,ECTlV.E WIDTH COVERING From Figure 6-8, find the standard asbestos roofing and
Inches mm 1½ Corr. 2112 Corr.
accessories required.

26" x 8 ft. I .65 x 2.40 .46 m . .31 m .

29" x 8 ft. \ .. 725 x 2.40 . 53 m. .38 m.

6-2 Asbestos Roofing

Estimating the asbestos roofing material is simpler than

that of the G.I. sheet because all the accessories and parts to be
y ·,•po<"·._____.:;
used such as gutter, ridge, hip and valley rolls are readily made
for installation. Unlike the galvanized iron roofing, all the acces-
'I sories are made on the site out from the standard dimension of FIGURE 6-8
,, '
' .90 x 2.40 m. plain G.I. sheets.
~
The steps i~· estimating the asbestos roofing materials are
enumerated as follows: 'Solution

1. The number of corrugated sheet is determined by A. Corrugated Sheets

dividing the gutter length by the effective width co.vering
of one sheet. 1. Find the number of corrugated sheets. Refer to
Table 6-8
2. In finding the .number of flashing, gutter, ridge, hip
and valley rolls, divide the total length by the effective 26.00
,838 31.02 pcs.
length of the accessories.
2. Length of rafter = 3.00 m.
3. Other parts such as ridge, end cap, apron flashing,
Order:
gutter corner, dowspout and fittings are determined by di-
1
rect counting, they are all"readily made according to fac-
62 pcs. 3.00 m. standard asbestos corrugated
tory standard,, sizes.
sheets

192
193
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE ROOFING MATERIALS

B. Gutter 3. Kanaletas
4. Placa Romana
l. Divide the total length of the gutter by the effec- 5. Tencor Corrugated Sheet
tive length of one gutter. Refer to Table 6-8. 6. Ardex lightweight corrugated sheet
a. Standard Ardex
26 x 2 = 52.00 meters b. Super Ardex

52.00
2.336 m. = 22.26 pcs. TECHNICAL DATA FOR ESTIMATING PURPOSES

3. Ridge Roll: Total length = 26.00 m. TABLE 6-8 STANDARD CORRUGATED SHEETS
Length 1.20 X 3.00 m.
26.00 . End Lapping: qelow 20 degree .30 m .
= 31.02 pcs.
.838 above 20 degree . 15 m .
Width: Effective width .838 m .
C. Flashing Ridge Roil. Eff. Length .838 m .
Gutter Effective l:ength 2.336 m.
l. Find the total length Outside Flashing 2.286 m.
Hip Roll 1.676 m .
~ 3.00 X 4 = 12.00 m.
.838 m.
2. Referring to Table 6-8
Divide: Lap

12.00 5.249 pcs.

2.286 m. .98 m.

~ D. Ridge End Cap - By actual counting

FIGURE 6-9

~
TABLE 6-9 CORRUGATED SHEETS

Standard Length 2.438 m.

~ Width (effective) .965 m .
.965 m.
DIFFERENT KINDS OF ASBESTOS ROOFING Ridge Roll (effective length)
Outside Flashing eff. length 2.286 m .
l. Standard Corrugated Sheet
2. 4-V Corrugated Sheet Other accessories estimate by direct counting method.
i'

194 195
 SIMPLl!=IED COI\ISTRUCTBON ESTIMATE ROOFING MATERIALS

965 m 1.10 m. Lap

· Lap

1.oom. 1.18 m.

FIGURE 6-10 FIGURE 6-12

TABLE 6-1·0 KANALETAS

TABLE 6-12 TENCOR CORRUGATED SHEETS
Length • 7.315 m.
Standard Length 2.44 m .
Effective Width .885 m.
Lapping .1 5 m. or .30 m .
Eaves Flashing .885 m.
2.40 to 3.00 m. effective length Effective Length 2.29 m. or 2.14 m.
Outside Flashing
Standard Width .748 m.
Effective Width .675 m.
'► Outside Flashing 1.50 to 3.00 m .
Minus Lapping . 15 m.
Ridge ~oil .9525 rn.

Other accessories, estimate by direct count .

FIGURE 6-11

TABLE 6-11 PLACA ROMANA

.812 m.
.E:=S .75 m.

FIGURE 6-13
Standard Length .600m'. TABLE 6-13 ARDEX CORRUGATED SHEETS
Effective Length 1.180 m.
Standard Width 1.100 m~ MEASUREMENT
Effective Width .200 m.
,:\ End Lap .080 m. STANDARD SUPER
Side Lap 1.100 m. Standard Width .52 m . 1.05 m~ I
Ridge Roll Effective Length 2.286 m.
Outside Flashing Effective Length Effective Width .45 m . .97 m .
1.100 m. Nominal Length . 75 to 3 .15 m. 2.40 to 3.60 m.
Ridge Flashing Effective Length 1.100 m.. 'Ridge Roll Eff. Length ' .95 m: . 95 m .
. Eaves Flashing Effective L,ength
,Outside Flashing 1.50 to. 2.00 m. 1.50 to 3.00 m.
~l Other accesso.ries, estimate by direct count. 'Side Lapping . 15 m. · . 15 m.
:I

196
197
 ROOFING MATERIALS
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

~
Technical Data:

Steel base thickness 0.60 mm.

Total Coated thickness = 0.63 mm.
Lap
Weight per meter length of panel = 2.66 kg.
Weight per covered area = 6.55 kg/m 2
FIGUREG-14 Length available up to = 15 m .
Longer length through special
order up to = 35 m.
6-3 COLORBOND KLIP-LOK
Overall width .427 m .
Effective Width Coverage .406 m.

Colorbond is a corrosion resistant zinc coated steel sheet

prepainted steel ribbed tray roofing and walling with the
TABLE 6-14 RECOMMENDED FASTENERS TWO
following special features: FASTENERS REQUIRED PER CUP

l. Concealed fastening
2. Lock action rib, design Support· member Norm.ii fastening Fastening over insulation blanket
up to 4" (100 mm)
3. Attractive fluted trays. Steel up to 3/32" 12.5 mm) No. 10-16,x 5/8" (16 mm) wafer heaci No. 10-16 x 7/8" (22 mm) wafer head
thick self drilling and tapping screw. self drilling and tapping screw.
4. Nea.r flat roof slopes Steel 3/32" to 3/16"' No. 10-24 x 5/8" {16 mm) wafer head No: 10-24 >c 7/8" (22 mm) wafer head
(2.5 to 5 mm) thick self drilling and tapping screw. self drilling and tapping screw.
5. Less supports - wider spaced Steel over 3/16" (5 mm) No. 10·24 x 5/8" (16 mm) wafer head Pre-dtill 11/64" (4.5 mm) hole for No. 10-24 x
thick thread cutti,ng screw. Drill 11/64" 7/8" (22 mm) wafer head self drilling and
6. Strong lightweight steel (4.5mm). tapping screw.
Hardwood 2" ,,_ 9G {50 x 3. 75 mm) countersunk 2½" x 9G (60 x 3.75 mm) countersunk
7. Custom cut long lengths head ~v. spiral nail, or No. 10-12 x 1" head galv. spiral nail, or No. 10-12 x ·1¾"
(25 mm) type 17 wafer head self drilling (45 mm) type 17 wafer head self drilling
woodscrew. woodscrew.
So~wood No.·10-12 x 1¾" (45 mm) type 17 No.10-12 x 1¾" (45 mm) type 17
wafer head self drilling woodscrt;!W. wafer head self drilling woodscrew.
1 1 /1.•" (27 mm)·
Mean Rib Width
15 /a"
(41 mm)
---.m.
MALE AID• \~ ________ _ 6-4 BANAWE HORIZONTAL METAL TILE
FEMALE RIB
'
Technical Data
8;, (203 mm) 8" (203 mm)
Nominal Width .228 m.
16" (406-mm) Coverage
Effective Width Coverage -- .204 m.
16 13 / " (427 mm) Overall Width
16
Length = 12.19 m .
Lon~er Length Special Order
-FIGURE 6-15 Minimum Slope 15

199
198
 ROOFING MATERIALS
SIMPUFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

~~ ~
5 m.

1.0•"'"'
0~1:cl\l'Gl:c
0.1s m.

. ~~""""'° ----;:_--:.--->
__,._\ I ( I _.\
0.95 to 1.125 m . - - ~
I
'f\ .. FIGURE 6-17
. .-----' "'"'~
\ -
- ~ - ·--- ' ,, 3 "'"' J>.'- ,illO' 15,
~~?.? .&MINIMUM qQQF INCLINATION
?.O,3.S \ ,io!Jl\tl 6-6 COLORBOND CUSTOM ORB
' ----------Cross Section of Banawe Metal Tile Technical Data:
Norn in al Width· .86 m.
r Effective Coverage .76 m.
~ Length: Available up to
r FIGURE 6-16 longer length Special Order
'~
Maxim um recommended' .length
~
for continuous sheet without
~ ------ expansion joints 24m.

J po 6-5 MARCELO ROOFING SYSTEM Cre~t Fastening to Steel

~
~
Technical Data:
I
Width = l.14rn.
i = 1.11m.
i Length
... Effective Width Coverage = .96m.
Effective Length less .15 m. - - - - - - 0 . 8 6 m.-----..,;
!" = .96m.
end 'lap 'CUSTOM ORB
Effective area coverage per sheet = .92.sq. m.

No. of Fastener per Sheet

1. First Row
2. Succeeding Rows
= 15 pcs./sheet
= lO pcs./sheet
-+
~:-=====-- ~

Crest Fastening to Wood

3. Av.erage no. of fasteners FIGURE 6-18

= 12 pcs./sheet
per sheet
201

200
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE ROOFING MATERIALS
Notch and turn down edge of
capping between ribs. RIDGE CAPPING
6~7 MILANO LONGSPAN STEEL. BRICKS
Technical Data:
Steei based thickness = 0.40 mm. (No. 26)
Total coated thickness = 0.43 mm.·
Weight per Sq. M. = 4.53 kg./m 2
Weight per Length = 3.44 kg./m.2
Effective coverage = .67 m.
Turn up trey between ribs.
Length up to = 6.00 m. TRANSVERSE FASCIA CAPPING Notch and turn down edge of
capping between ribs.
Longer length Special Order
Recommended roof slo2_e = 10° min.

~'
'
• + 51/8 in.+
(130mm}
+-+
.
23/Sin
160mm}

". 30 in (760 mml COVER

~·
~
FIGURE 6-20
'
r·. '
• Nailing positionfor intermediate tile presses. • Nailing position for ridge and gutter line tile presse/ Fasteners:
FIGURE 6-19 1. For Hardwood: Use type 17 self drilling wood
.:,, ''
"'' I
6-8 COLORBON'o TRIMDEK HI-TEN screw No. ~12 x 50 mm. hexagonal head with
neoprene washer.
Technical Data
.
I Steel Base thickness = 0.40mm.
2 .. For Softwood: Add 12 mm to length of screw.
.
I • Total coated thickness
Weight:
= 0.46 mm.

r.
I- 3. There should be four fasteners per sheet at all
Per Unit Area = 4.28 kg./m 2 supports.
Per Un it Len th = 3.26 kg./m 2
Norn inal Width = 0.83m.
4. Side lap fasteners use type S point self drilling
Effective Width coverage = 0.76 m.
screw No. 10 x 16 mm hexagonal head with
Available length up to = 15 m.
neopreae washers.
Longer length = Special Order
Minimum slope
5. Teks self drilling screw to steel supporters up to
l. Single s~eet = 3
4.5 mm thick use No. 12 x 45 mm. hexagonal
2 Roof with end lap = 5
head_ with neoprene washer.

202
l 203
 \

ROOFING MATERIALS
\.

chapter ]
TABLE,6-16 DESCRIPTION AND CONSTRUCTION DATA

Description Weight Per Total No. of Pcs. Needed

Pcs. iri Kg.

TILEWORK
Marceille Type (Flat) 3.60 Per Sq. M. 14.0

Ondula Type (Wavy) 4.00 Per Sq. M. 15.0

7-1 CERAMIC TILES
Sr. (Standard Ridge) 2.80 eer Lin. M. 2.5

Half-Marceille 2.00 Per Line 1.0

~ Ceramic tile is one of man's oldest building material con-
JRT - 1 3.00 Per Sq. M. 13.0 tinuously in use due to its unique, functional and decorative
,, properties: Ceramic tiles offer an almost unlimited choice of
JRT - 2 3.75 Per Lin. M. 4.0
patterns and colors which does not fade and is practically un-
.,"' JRT - 3 3.20 Per Line 1.0 destructible.
i,
JRT - 4 3.20 Per Line 1.0
k
The decorative ceramic tiles are wido1y used during the
~:: JRT

SRT
- 5

- 1
2.20

4.00
Per Lin. M.

Per Sq. M.
4.0

13.0
period of the Medieval Islamic Architecture from Persia to
. Spain and was extended up to the period of the contemporary
'
SRT - 2
'
Architecture.
~• 2.20 Per Line . 1.0
SRT - L 2.25 Per Line 1.0 Ceramic tiles are classified as:
SRT - R 2.25 Per Line 1.0

~::
i,.,
JSR - 2.00 Peri Line M. 4.0 I. Glazed Tiles - are principally used for walls and light
duty floors.
r· SRT - u 1.75 Per Sq. M. 25.0
SRT - T 1.50 Per Sq. M. 25.0 2. Unglazed Tiles - are hard, dense and homogeneous
JSR 3.00 Per Lin. M.
composition, primarily used for floors and walls.
4.0 H

Types of Tiles
' I

1. · Porcelain tiles are made from the pressed dust

processed into fine grain, smooth, dense and shapely
formed face.

204
205
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE TILEWORKS

2. Natural clay tiles are made from either the pressed

method or the plastic method from dust clay that pro-
duced a dense body ·with distinctive slightly texture ap-
pearance.
0 .. ·. ---1 Glazed Tiles
3. Ceramic ·mosaic tiles are mounted on a 30 cm. x

l
30 cm. paper as binder of the tiles to facilitate its laying
or setting.
I

4. Quarry tiles are made through the plastic extrac- I.SO m.

tion process from natural clay or shale.

5. Faience Mosaic Tiles are tiles less than 15 square

centimeters in facial form.
()()
~-
'1,·

6. Special purpose tile are:

a. Nonslip tiles
V
b. Ship or Gally
c. Frostproof tiles
FIGURE 7-1
d. Conductive tiles

Illustration 7-1 Solution

From Figure 7-1, solve for the following materials: A. Mosaic Tile Flooring

a. .30 x .. 30 m. floor mosaic tiles 1. Solve for the floor area

b . . 106 x .106 m. wall glazed tiles
c. Internal bead and capping 1.50 x 2.00 = 3.0 sq. m.,
d. Internal corner bead
e. External corner bead 2. Referring to Table 7-1
' f. Ordinary portland cement
g. White cement 3.0 x 10. 76 = 32.3 say 33 pcs.
r

206 207
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE TILEWORKS

8. Glazed Tiles for Walls 2. Add capping along door jamb = 3.00 m.
Total = 9.25 m
1. Solve for the total lateral area of the wall.
3. Refer'ring to Table 7-1
2(2.00) + (1.50 + .7_5) x 1.50 ht.
9.25 x 9 = 83.2 say 84 pcs.
6.25 X 1.50
9.37 say 9.4 sq. m. E. Internal Corner Bead

2- Referring to Table 7-1 By Direct Counting = 4 pcs.

Multiply:

9.4 X 85.7 805.6 say 806 pcs. F. External Corner Bead = 4 pcs.

C. Internal Bead G. Ordinary Portland Cement for Paste

l. Solve for the length of inside corner 1. Total Area = 3.0 + 9.4 = 12.4 sq. m.

2(2.00) + (1.50 + 1.50) = 7.00 m. 2. Referring to Table 7,1

2. Length of the 4 wall corners: 12.4 x 3 = 37.2 kilos say 1 bag of 40 kg.

4(1.50) + 7.00 m.
H. White Cement
6.00 + 7.00 = 13.00 m.
12.4 x 1.0 = 12.4 say 13 kg.
3. Referring to Table 7-1
Multiply:
Note:
,, 13.00 x 9 = 1,17 pcs.
· The above computation does not include the con-
D. Capping crete hollow blocks, its plastering and the <;:oncrete slab
flooring. What was presented in th~ illustration is how to
1. Solve for the perimeter of the wal I tiles determine the quantity -of ceramic tiles, its fitting acces-
. sories and the cement paste for setting.
2(2.00) + 150 + .75 =: 6.25 m.

209
208
 ~IMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
TILEWORKS

SUMMARY
7-2 TERRAZO AND GRANOLITHIC
33 pcs. .30 x .30 m. mosaic tiles
806 pcs. .106 x .106 m. glazed tiles A type of marble mosaic finished that uses portland
117 pcs. .106 m. Internal Bead cement as base material. It has a characteristic of durability of
g~eat beauty and variety.
84 pcs. .106 m. capping
4 pcs. .106 m. Internal corner bead
4 pcs. There are two methods of installation:
.106 m. External corner bead
1 bag 40 kg. portland cement
13 kg. White cement 1. Monolithic or Cast-in-Place - The floor is cast direct-
ly on top of the concrete floor slab preferrably not less
than 24 hours nor more than 6 days after the slab is
poured.

TABLE 7-1 SIZE AND QUANTITY OF CERAMIC TILES PER 2. Pre-cast - Where terrazo or granolithic fini~h are
SQUARE METER made on top of a cement mortar base molaed in various
-
CLASSIFICATIONS SIZE NO.OF PCS.PER tile dimensions. A dividing strips of a half hard brass with
alloy zinc are used between tiles to control and localized
SQ.FT.· SQ.M.
·-
any shrinkage or flexure cracks. The dividing strip thick-
Mosaic Tiles 12" X 12" ' 1.0·00 10.76 ness ranges from 1.56 mm to 3.12 mm or thicker depen-
Vetrified Tiles 3" X 3" 16.000 177.78 ding upon the design.
Glazed Jiles 4" X 4" 9.000 100.00
4¼" X 4¼" 7.970 85.73 Monolithic or Cast-in-Place Estimating Procedure
6" X 6" 4.000 44.44
Hexagonal Tiles 2" X 2" 44.59-0 480.00 1. So.Ive for the total floor area in sq. m.
3" X 3" 17.650 190.00
4¼" X 4¼" 8.825 95.00 2. Multiply the area by .112 to get the number of bags
5 Point Hexagonal 2" · 6.096 20 perm. of white or colored cement required.
4 Point Hexagonal 2" 4.884 16 perm. 3. Multiply the floor area by 12.5 to get the weight of
Capping 4¼'' 2.743 9 perm. the marble chips iri, kilogram.
Internal Bead 4¼" 2.743 9 perm.
4. Multiply the quantity found by the un_it cost.

External Corner Bead - By direct count Illustration 7~2

Internal Corner Bead - By direct count

White Cement Filler Mortar - 1 kilo per sq. m. For an 8.00 m. by 10.00 m. room that specify cast-in-
Portland Cement Paste - .076 bags per sq. m. place granolithic floor, list down the materials required.

210
211
 TILEWORKS
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

.40 X .40 m. .40 X .40 m.

Solution Tiles
TIies

1. Find the floor area

8.00 X 10.00 m. 80 sq. m. lOJOO m.
2. White Cement
lllllllllillr I+

t-"~'··-+
80 x .112 = 8.96 say 9 bags
3. Marble chips

80 x 12.5 = 1,000 kg.

FIGURE 7-2

TABLE 7-2 TERRAZO AND GRANOLITHICTILES Solution

CEMENT BRASS
STOCK IN BAGS DIVIDER
PIECES PER SQ.M. INM. 1. Solve for the floor area.
SIZE MIXTURE SAND PER:SQ.M.
PER
SQ.M. A .B
10 m. x 20 m. = 200 sq. m.
.20 X .20 25.00 .338 .225 .0188 10.8
2. Referring to Table 7-2
.225 X .225 19.75 -~38 .225 .0188 10.0
.25 X .25 16.00 .338 .225 .0188 8.9
200 x 6.25 = 1,250 pcs.

;30 X .30 11. 11 .388 .225 .0188 8.0 3. Solve for the cement using class B mortar

.35 X .35 8.16 .338 .225 .0188 6.0

200 x .225 = 45 bags
.40 X .40 6.25 .338 .225 .0188 5.8
4. Sand: Referring to Table 7-2
Mu.ltiply:
Illustration 7-3
200 x ;0188 = 3.7 say 4 cu. m.
A room with a general floor dimension of 10.00 m. x
20.00 m. specify a .40 x .40 m. granolithic floor on a class B 5. Brass divider, From Table 7-2
mortar base. Find· the numb~r of .40 m. tiles, cement, sand for
mortar and the brass divider. 200 x 5.8 = 1,160 meters

I
I
212 213 I
I
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE TILEWORKS

. Solution by the Unit Measure Method

7-3 CEMENT TILES
~
1. Divide:
Cement tiles are hydraulic pressed, locally manufactured
in the following c9mmercial sizes. 7.00
= 35 pcs.
~
25 mm x 15 cm. x 15 cm.
25 mm x 20 cm. x 20 cm. 9.00
25 mm x 25 cm. x 25 cir1. .20 = 45-pcs.
25 mm x 30 cm. x 30 cm.
2. Multiply:

Estimating the number of cement tile includes the cement

mortar computed at an average thickness of 20 mm.
35 x 45 = 1,575 pcs.
3. Cement Mortar from Table 7-2
The methods of computation are either by: 7.QQ X 9.QQ X .0188 = 1.18 CU. m.

1. Unit measure method 4. Referring to Table 2-1

2. Square meter area method
Multiply:

Illustration 7-4 Cement: 1.18 X .12 = 14.16 bags

Sand 1.18 X 1.0 = 1.18 cu. m.
Find the number of .20 m. by .20 m. cement tiles required Solution by the Square Meter Area Method
for a 7.00 x 9.00 m. classroom using class B mortar.
1. Solve for the floor area
7.00 x 9,00 = 63 sq. m.

2 .. Referring to Table 7-2

Multiply:
7.00 m. .20 X .20 m.
Cement Tiles
~ · 63 x 25 = 1,575 pcs.
~ )
3. Mortar; using class B

- - - - - - 9.00 m. - - - - - - Cement Tiles

Cement: 63 X .225 = 14.17 b,ags
Sand 63 X .0188 = 1.18 cu.m.
FIGURE 7-3

214 215
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE TILEWORKS

Illustration 7-5 7-4 VINYL AND RUBBER TILES

From Figure 7-4, find the number of 25 mm x ·?,5 x .25 · Vinyl and rubber tiles shall be non-fading, odorless and
m. cement tiles and the mortar using class "A" mixture. nonslip even when wet and shall be strong enough to withstand
.. the ordinary tear and wear, cleaning and moving of furnitures
without qamage and shall be self dealing.

T + Tiles shall be laid to conform with the manufacturer's spe-

cifications. Adhesive cement shall be applied to the floor every
,
is.oo m. I
'
A B

+· after the tiles are laid on the surface. Tiles are pressed with
linoleu roller to avoid blisters. After,completion, all work shall
be cleaned of cement, dirt and other: substances, apply° two

-+
coats of wax and polish to smooth shiny finished.
--+-a.oo m.--t--- 18.00 m.

FIGURE 7-4 TABLi:: 7-3 VINYL AND RUBBER TILES

Solution
SIZE
II NUMBE~
SQ.M.
PER' I
GALLONS OF
ADHESIVE PER
SQ.METER
1. Find the total area of A and B --
3mm X .20 m x .20 m. I 25.00 I .042
A = 15.00 x 8.00 ~ 120 sq. m.
B = 18.00 x 8.00 = 144 sq. m. 3mm x .225 m. x .225 m. 19.75 .042
Total Area = 264 sq. m.
3 mm. x .25 m x :25 m. 16.00 .042
2. Referring to Table 7-2
3 mm. x .30 m. x .30 m. 11, 11 .042
Multiply:

264 x 16 = 4,224 pcs. 3 mm; x .40-in. x .40 m. 6.25 .042

3mm. x .60m. x .60m.l 2.78 . .042

3. Mortar: From Table 7-2

Cement: 264 x .338 = 89.2 say 83 bags

,.. Sand 264 x .0188 =, 4-.96 ·say 5 cu. m.

216
217
 8
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

chapter
Illustration 7-6

Find the number of .30 x .30 m. vinyl tiles and its adhe-
sive for a classroom floor measuring 7.00 x 9.00 meters.

Solution
HARDWARE-
1. Solve for the floor area

7.00 x 9.00 = 63 sq. m. 8-1 BOLTS

2. Referring to Table 7-3 Bolt is a pin or a rod with a head at one end threaded at
the other end to receive a nut.
63 x 11.11 = 700 pcs.
Kinds of Bolt:
3. Adhesive cement
1. Machine Bolt - Has· a head at one end and a short
th read at the other end.
63 x .042 = 2.65 say 3 gallons
2. Countersunk Bolt - Has a beveled head fitting into a
countersunk hole.

3. Key Head Bolt - Has a head shaped end fitted to a

groove that will not turn when the nut is screwed into the
other end.

4. Stud Bolt - A headless bolt threaded at both ends.

Nut End Attachment End

STUD BOLTS

FIGURE 8-1
' • I
I
I

218 219
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
HARDWARE

~~0
~ 0 • ·-i :&if ◄
• · · · ·Bevel He?d

• =
· Railroad Track Bolt Welded Eye Bolt

Countersunk Head

~
Oval H e a d ~

~
Turned '\~

Plain and Shouldered Step Bolt Bastard Head

Forged Eye Bolts
Carriage Bolts

.
Tire Bolt
•
-----• FIGURE 8-3

~' ·~-- ~
~
Stove Bolt
~. ==:·>:.:·aC
~, 1151 '· ,i::11111:11111
e.·,·~- I!:,_.
Nut End Body 1:At~~hmentEnd
I,

~xpansion Bolt Common or Machine and Stud Bolts

Various Bolts

FIGURE 8-2
FIGURE 8 - 4 ..r
C

iI 220
l 22fl

L
 SIMPLlflED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE HARDWARE

TABLE 8-1 U.S. STANDARD THREAD OF BOLTS TABLE 8-3 POST ROUGH HARDWARE

DIAMETER OF BOLtS SIZE OF W.1.POST PS. BOLT W.1.SPUCE ss. BOLT

Strap No. Diam: Strap No. Diam:
LENGTH ½ 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1¼ POST i~ mm
mm 12 16 19 22 25 28 31 56.25 X 37 X 900 4 12mm
10 X 10 56.25 X 62.5 X 600 2 12mm
I i2.5x 12.5
10 1.44 2.45 3.64 5.24 7.23 9.7-8 12.60 15' X 15
17.5x 17.5
12.5 1.69 2.85 4.21 6.01 8.24 11.06 14.18 16mm 56.25 50 X 600 4 16mm
20 X 20 56.25 )( 50 X 600 2 X
22.5x 22:s
15 1.94 3.24 4.78 q.78 9.26 12.33 15.76 25 X 25
27.5x 27.5 59 X 62.5 X 600 2 19mm 59 X 62.5 X 900 4· 19mrr
17.5 2.19 3.64 5.35 7.55 10.27 13.61 17.35

20 2.45 4.03 5.92 8.32 11.29 14.89 18.93

22.5 -. 2.70 4.43 6.49 9.09 12.30 16.17 20.51 Estimating Procedur-e:
. 25 2.95 4.82 7.06 9.86 13.31 17.44 22.09
l. Post strap or Splice Strap = the length of the bolt is
27.5 3.20 5.22. 7.63 10.63 14.33 18.72 23.67 eq1Jal to the width of the post plus 25 mm.
30 3.46 5.61 8.20 11.40 15 .34 20.00 25.26
L = W + 25 mm.
32.5 3.71 6.01 8.77 12.17 16.36 21.27 26.84

3.96 6.40 9.34 12.94 17.37

2, Post and single-beam (with 25 mm dap)
35 22.55 28.42

TABLE 8-2 WEIGHT OF BOLTS, WITH SQUARE HEADS AND

HEXAGONAL NUTS PER 10 BOLT
- Beam
::fz·~ Bolt
Diameter: ¼, 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 I~. f Bolt Washes
of Bolts:
6 7 9 10 12 14 16 19 22 25 mm
No. of Thread 20 18 16 14 13 12 11 10 9 9
'25lmrn- Dap ·
per inch:

Diameter of: 3 6 8 9 11 12 13 18 l9 22 mm
Top Drill
13/64 ¼ 5/16 23/64 27 /64 15/64• 17 /32
ll_ 'I• ..2.. _ll_ _lJ_ _j_§__ _lL g_ 2- & I~.
64 · I6 64 64 64 32 64 4 64 FIGURE 8-5

223
22i
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE HARDWARE

Length of Bolt = width of the post plus the thickness Length of Bolt = Width of the post plus tl + t2-25mm

of the beam.
L = W + (tl + t2) - 25 mm.
L = w + t
5. On Trusses
3. Post and two beams of same thickness with 25 mm dap. Length of Bolts= thickness of the member in layer
plus 25 iTlm.

~ ci, I f
Beam .5 cm.
5 cm.

+ L-- Wood Block

:= 5 cm.

FIGURE 8-6 L - Machine Bolts

Length of Bolt = Width of the post plus 2 thickness of

beam minus 25 mm. FIGURE 8-8

L = W + 2t - 25 mm.
E;><ample: 3 x 50 rnm = 150 mm + 25 mm
4. Post and 2 beams of different thickness =='175mm.

TABLE 8-4 POST ROUGH HARDWARE

./"
SIZE OF WOOD W.I.STRAP BOLTS W.1.SPLICE SPLICE BOLTS
POST mm No. & Dia. Strap No. & Dia.
i11 cm. mm. mm. mm.
10 X 10
12.5 X 12.5 2 ·6 X 62 X 600 2 - 12 2·6 X 37 X 800 4 - 12
15 X 15
25 mm Dap
17.5 X 17.5
20 X 20 2·6 X 62 X 600 2 - 16 2·6 X 50 X 800 4 - 16
22.5 X 22.5
25 X 25
FIGURE 8-7 30 X 30 2 -9 X 62 X 600. 2 - 20 2 •9 X 62 X 800 4 - 20

224 225
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE HARDWARE

8-2 SCREW Finish

6. Bronzed
In carpentry-work, screw is sometimes used instead of naifs 1. Bright 7 .. Coppered
due to the following advantages: 2. Blued 8. J°apanned
3. Nickel Plated 9. Lacquered
1. Greater holding power 4. Silver Plated 10. Tinned
2. Neat in appearance 5. Brass 11. Galvanized
3. Less chance of injuring the materials
4. Ease of removal in case 'of repair Length of Screw
One important thing to know in ordering screw is its
Kinds of Screw length to avoid confusion and mistake.

A. Wood screw - Is a screw n.:1il with handed coarse thread -:=-,... _._ ..,.\
to give a grip. . ,--..,---=--~·

Materials Used

1. Iron 3. Brass 5. Bronze

. -~-~~~
'
2. Steel. 4. Copper

Shape of the Head

1. Flat 7. Punched
2. Round 8. Headless
3. Fillister 9. Slotted (Wood Screw)
4. Oval _,,. 10. Square (Lag Screw) The Effective Length of Screw~
/
5. Winged 11. Hexagonal Standard Wood Screw Point
6. Bung 12. Clpve
FIGURE 8-9

--
13. Gr:noved
Shape of the Point Ordinary Lag Screw

1. Standard 3. Coarse 2. Full length

Dutx
1. Wood (Jight duty) 2. Lag (heavy duty)
Coach Lag Screw

FIGURE 8-10
)iI
226 227
 HARDWARE
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

TABLE 8-5 STANDARD WOOD SCREW AND NUMBER PER

There are three shapes of point
KILOGRAM
1. Gimlet - used on wood and coach screws.
2. Diamond - is used when more driving is done before ! nches: ½ 1½ 2 2½ 3 3'/2 4 4½ 5' 6
turning as in drive and lag screw.
rn. rn. 12 25 37 50 62 . 75 87 1 oo 112 I 1 25 150
~- Conical - same as diamond.

,,~
.Numberl6,21ll3,443 2,32911,779 1,414\1,186 1,1261910 7391655 515

8-3 NAILS

-=-~
Gimlet Diamant Cone
The first handmade nails were used in the United States
Flat Head Round Head
which lasted up to the end of the Colonial Period. In France,
light-nails for carpenters were made by hand and hammer out of
~c
steel wire as early as the days of Napoleon I. In the United
Oval Head 1
. fl!'
~ ~
~ Countersunk
FillistetHead States the wire nails were first 'made in 1851 by William Herser
of New York and later in 1876 Father Goebel introduced the
manufacture of wire nails. At the last part of the 18th century,
~ ""~ twenty three patents for nail making machine were approved
in the United States which was later introduced in England.

ez;:n
,,w~ Gro.ov~

~~
-==--Heudless
·, Kinds of Nail as to:

1. Cross-Sectionai·Shape

\;_C;~ . Dowel ~ a) Cut (rectangular)

~-~~
b) Wire (circular)

2. Size
Winged Winged Winged Head

~~✓- Drive
--.i a) Tracks
b) Sprigs
c) Brads
d) Nails
e) Spike
(Various .Wood Screws

_ FIGURE 8-11
229
228
 HARDWARE
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

-C. Brads
3. Materials
c) Copper Small slender nails with small deep heads. The common
a) Steel
b) Brass variety is made in sizes from 2.5 cm. (2d) to 15 cm. (Gd) in
length whH,e the flooring brads - from 5 cm,. to 10 cni. length.
4. Finish
D. Nails
c) Galvanized
a) Plain
d) Blued A popular name for all kinds of mail except those ex-
b) Coated
treme sizes such as Tacks and Spikes. The most generally used
5. Service are called Common Nails of sizes from 2.5 cm. to 15 cm.

c) Finishing
a) Common E. Spikes
d) Roofing
b) Flooring
r e) Boat, etc.
I An ordinary spike is a stout piece of metal from 7.5 cm. to
!ii< 30 cm. in length, much thicker in proportion than a common
. A. Tacks
nail.
-
'
~
Is a small' sharp pointed nails with tapering sides and a
',
Spike is much used in attaching railroad rails, construction
~
thin flat head.
Tacks are nails ~hiefly used in fastening carpets and .of do_cks, piers and other wo.rk that us~s large timber .

~
flashing of any thin materials.

"
I'
...
...
_,,.,.
►m.:.,;.~'" ·,~
Flat Head Diamond Point

~
Felt Ovjiffi"•c ;~ ·0 . '; -a:'. )
FIGURE 8-12 Oval Head Chisel Point

',
B. Sprigs

Small headless nails sometimes called barbed dowel pins.

FIGURE 8-13
The regular size of sprigs ranges from 12 mm. to 5.0 cm. gauge
No. 8 wire or 4 mm. dicfmeter.
231

230
 SIMPLIFIED CONS:TRUCTl9N ESTIMATE HARDWARE

Two Kinds of Spikes

TABLE 8-7 FLOORING BRADS
a) Flat Head, diamond point
b) Oval Head, chisel point
SIZE Le11gth Gauge Dia. Head Approx. Gauge No. of,Nails
mm. no. Gauge No./Kilo 110. Per-Keg.
F. Boat Spikes
Gd so 11 6 322 12 14,500
A small kind of nail driven mostly in hard timber with a 7d 32 11 6 277 12 12,500
clear cut sharp chisel point.
8d 37 10 5 200 11 9,000

9d 44 10 5 .173 11 7,800
TABLE 8-6 NUMBER OF WIRE TACKS PER KILO
10d 75 9 4 131 10 5,900
LENGTH NUMBER -~~ -

mm. PER KILO 95 9 4,300

INCHES 12d 81 8 3
3 35,200
1/8 16d 87 7 2 76 8 3,450
5 23,465
3/16 2,600
6 17,600 20d 100 6 1 57 ,7
1/4
8 14,080
S/16
3/8 10 11,732
TABLE 8-8 COMMON WIRE NAILS
7/16 12 8,800
9/16 14 5,865 SIZE GAUGE LENGTH APPX. No.
16 No. In. mm. Per Kilo . Per Keg.
_5/8 4,400
11 /16 17 10,120 2d· 15 1¼ 25 1,831 82,400
3/4 19 2,930 3d 14 . l½ 31 1,177 53,000
r 13/16 20.5 2,514 4d 12.5 1½ 37 666 30,000
7/8 , 22 5d 12.5 P/4 44 580 26,100
1,200 6d 11.5
15/16 2 50 382 17,200
24 1,953 7d 11.5 2¼
' 56 344 15,500
1 25 1,760 8d 10.25 2½ 63 208 9,400
1-1 /16 27 1,599.
9d 10~25 2¾ 69 188 8,500
lOd 9 3 75 138 6,250
1-1 /8 28 1,465 12d 9 -3¼ 81 124 5,600
16d 8 3½ 88 93 4,200
20d 6 4 100 58 2,625
40d 4. 5 112 45 2,040
SOd 3 5½ 125 34 l,540
60d 2 6 150 20 910

232 233
 (

SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE HARDWARE

TABLE 8-11
TABLE 8-9 COMMON BRADS USES AND APPROXIMATE QUANTITY 0
NAILS
SIZE LENGTH APPX.No. MATERIAL
UNDT PER REQ,O. SIZE
Inches mm Per Kilo Per Keg KIND
KILOS
2d 1 25 l,904 85,700 Floor Joist and Bridging
3d 1¼ 31 1,206 54,300 @.30m. o.c. sq. m. .17 20d . 'CWN
4d 1½ 37 662 29,800
5d 13/4 44 566 25,500
T & G Flooring
6d 2 50 397 1.7,900 1 X 4"
7d 21/4 ·56 340 15,300 sq. m. .15 Gd
1 X 6" sq. m. Flooring Br~
8d 2½ 63 224 10,100 .09 Gd Flooring Br.
(, 9d 2¾ 69 197 8,900·
10d 3 75 146 6,600 Siding Wood Board on
~ 12d 3¾ 81' 137 6,200 Studs @ .60 o.c.
·1 X 6

~
16d 3½ 88 108 4,900 sq. m .08 Gd
1 X 8 Casing Brads
20d , , 4 100 68 3,100 ~q. m. .06 Gd . Casing Brads
~. 30d 41/~ 112 53
.
i
,, _ 40d
2,400 Studs: -
~. 50d
5
5½
125
137
.40
28
1,800
1,300
~.40 m. o.c.
@.60 m. o.c.
sq. m.
sq. m.
.08 8d CWN
.05 8d .CWN

t TABLE 8-10 ORDINARY SPIKES

5caffolding M. Ht~ of
Post
.73 20d CWN
~lywood Ceiling Per Sheet·,
@.15 o.c. on .055
SIZE LENGTH APPX.No. ! .20 X 2.40 m. 2d Finishing
.40 X .60 m.
lr.iches mm Per Kilo .90 X 1.80 m. .45 X .45 m . . 033 2d Finishing
Joists
)
10d 3 75 90
12d 3¼ 81 83 ~afters, Purl ins. and Per sq. m.
16d 3½ 88 66 :ieats Purlins .20 20d CWN
'!1
I
20d 4 100 50 @ .70 o.c.
30d 4½ 1'12 37
40d 5 125 28 ase Board
50d 5½ 22 Meter length .03 Gd .CWN
137
60d 6 _150 19 '
175 mm 7 . 175 15 ascia Board Meter length .048 8d CWN
200mm 8 200 9
225 mm 9 225 8
250mm 10 250 7 eiling Joist
300 nun 12, 300 6 @ .40 X .60 O.C. Sq.M. .05 8d CWN

234
23~
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
chapter ~

Iilustration 8-1

A wall partition 16.00 meters long by 3.00 meters high

specify the use of l" x 8" stone cut wood board on studs @.60
ST',AIRCASE.
m. o.c. Determine the nails required for the studs and the wood
board.
9-1 Definition of Terms /

Solution
Building staircase requires technical of structural carpen
A) Nails for the studs try and craftsmanship of cabinet making. It is like constructin£
an enclined bridge between two points on different floors with
l. Solve for the area of the wall uniform, well proportional treads and risers that are safe and
comfortable to climb and descend.
A = 20.00 x 3.00 m.
= 60 sq. m. Baluster - a small post supporting the' handrail or a coping.

2. Referring to Table 8-11 along stud@ .60 m. o.c. Balustrade - a series or row of balusters joined by. a hand-
rail or a coping as the parapet of a balcony.
Multiply:
Bearers - a· support for winders wedged into the walls se-
60 x .05 = 3.0 kilos 8d CW Nail cured by the strin_ger.

B) Nails for the 1 x 8 Wood Board Carriage - that -the portion which supports the steps of a
/ wooden stairs.
1. Area = 20.00 x 3.00 m.
Close String - a staircase without open well in a dog stairs.
A = 60 sq. m.
Cocktail Stair - Is a term given to a winding staircase.
2. Referring to Table 8-ll along l" x 8" board
Circulc1r Stair - a staircase with steps winding in a circle or
Multiply: cylinder.

, 60 X .06 3.6 say 4 kilos 6d CW Nail

237

236
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE STAIRCASE

Elliptical Stairs - those elliptical in plan where each tread Nosing - The front edge of the steps that project beyond
assembly converging in an elliptical ring in a plan. the riser.

Flight of Stairs - Is the series of steps leading from one Pitch - The angle of inclination of the horizontal of th e 1

landing to another. stairs.

Front String - the string pn the side of stairs where the

handrail is placed. Ramp - A slope surface that rises and twists simultaneously

Rise - The height of a flight of stairs from landing to land-

Flyers - steps in a flight that a.re parallel with each other.
ing or the height between successive treads or stairs.

Geometrical Stairs - Is a flight of a stair supported by the Riser - The vertical face of a stair step. -
wall at the end of the steps.

Half Space - The interval between two flights of steps in

Run - The horizontal distance from the first to the last
staircase. riser of a stair flight.

Handrail - a rail running par-allel with the inclination of the

Spandril - The angle formed by a stairway.
stairs that holds the balusters.
Staircase - Is the whole set of stairs; the structural contain-
Hollow Newel - An opening in the middle of the staircase ing a flight of a stairs.
' as distinguished from solid newel wherein the ends
of steps are attached. Stair Builders Truss - . Crossed beams which support the
landing of a stair.
Housing - The notches in the string board of a stair for the
. reception of stairs. Stairhead - The initial stair at the top of a fi'ight of stair or
r staircase.

Knee - Is the convex bend at the back of the handrail.

Stair Headroom - The clear vertical height 'measured from
the nosing of a stair tread to any overhead obstruc-
Landing - Is the horizontal floor as resting place in a tion.
flight.
Stairwell - The vertical shaft ·which contains a staircase.
Newel - The central column where the steps of a drcuiar
staircase wind. Step - A stair which consists of one tread and one riser.

238
239
 . SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE STAIRCASE

Steps - The assembly consisting of a tread and a riser. Winders - Steps not parallel with each other.

String - The part of a flight of stairs which forms its Wreath - The whole of a helically curved hand rail.
, ceiling or so,ffit.

Soffit - The underneath of an arch or moulding.

String Board - The board next to the wall hole which re-
·~
ceives the ends of the steps. Stringer _ _ _..,.~
;

Riser ----~,.r
Tread - The horizontal part of a step including the nosing.

Tread Run - The horizontal distance between two conse-

cutive risers or on an open riser stair, the horizontal
distance between .the nosings or the outer edges of
successive treads all measured perpendicular to the
front edges of the nosing or tread .

Tread Length - The dimension of a tread measured per-

pendicular to the normal line of travel on a stair.

~.Riser
. Tread Width - The dimension of a tread plus the projec-.
~ ~ Ste P
tion of the nosing.

Wall String - The 'board placed against the wall to receive

the end of the step.

Well - The place occupied by the plight of stairs. Step

t"

Well Hole - The opening in the floor at the top of a flighV

of stairs.

Well Staircase - A winding staircase enclosed by walls re-

sembling a well. FIGURE 9-1

240 241
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE . STAIRCASE

9-2 LAYING OUT OF STAIRS value in equal proportion to the number of risers but
in no case shall the•r1ser per step be -greater than/.19 nor
less than .17 m. otherwise, the stairs will not be an
in laying out of stairs, one has to conside_r the following ideal and comfortable one.
methods:

l. Determine the clear height of the rise in meter.

Illustration 9-1
Normally, the rise per step is from 17 cm. to 18 cm.
, Determine, the number of steps and the height of the riser
2. Divide the height of the rise by either ·.17 or .18 m. of a stair case .if the height of the rise is 2.20 m. using a .30 m.
to determine the number of steps from the 1st to the tread width.
next floor.
Solution
3. Divide the run distance by the effective width of the
tread as follows: 1. The height of the rise is 2.20 meters.

Width of Tread Effective Width 2. Assume that the riser per step is .17 m.
Divide:
For .25 m. .20m .
For .30 m. .25 m. Rise
No. of risers
Riser

The effective width of the tread is equals the width mi- 2.20 == 12.94
.17
nus the nosing computed at .05 m.

4. If the result found in step. 3 is less than the number 3. The answer has a fractional value of .94 but the _rule
found- in step 2 adjust the length of the run to obtain · says, "there should be no fractional value in dividing
an equal distances ahd proportional steps. the rise by the riser." Therefore we have to adjust.
1
5. The height of the risers should be uniform from the 4. Divide the rise by the whole value of 12 d_isregarding
first to the last step of the stair, hence, there,should be the fractional value of .94.
no fractional value in dividing the rise by the riser per
2.20
step: However, if fractional value could not be avoided _
12
= .1a3 m.
in dividing the rise by the riser, adj1.1st the fractional

243
242
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
'STAIRCASE

5. The .183 m. is now the height of the risers per step

which is equivalent to 18.3 cm. This value is not more R = No. of steps - 1 x .025 m. (see Figure 9-3)
than 19 cm. nor less than 17 cm. hence, considered as R = (12 - l)x .25 m.
R = 2.75 m.
ideal and comfortable.

6. Determine the distance of the run under the following

fo1'mula.

Run {No. of,,Steps - vx Effective width of the WELL HOLE.

tread
FLOOR
Where,:

Effective Width = Tread Width - Nosing CEILING

Nosing = 5 cm. or .05 m.

RUN OF STEP
:IE
0
0
a:
Q
<I
Floorline "':i:
I I ./ I
•.·;•·;,,
"'VI
Tread

+·- ·l ~
STRINGER

m~~
E E
0 O
.183 m Rise

+-··-·.· 5 cm Nosing
"'
a: "'N
II
RISE• PER STEP

RISER
Effective Width of Tread
Floorline
·FLOOR LINE

It 4------Run .RUN

.'
I .
!

FIGURE 9-2 FIGURE 9-3

244
245

il
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE STAIRCASE

There are instances wherein the length of the run and the
h_eight of the rise are given or existing and the question is how 3. Assuming that there are 15 steps instead of 14.72 deter-
to determine the width at
the tread and the height of each riser. I!
mine the height of the riser.

Illustration 9-2 2.65

.15 = 1766 m. or 17.66 cm.

Determine the hei_ght of the riser and the width of the

tread when the rise is 2.65 m. ar -1 the run is 2.75 m. This value is in between 17 to 19 cm. (acceptable)

4. Assume tha.t the tread width is 30 cm. or .30 m. the

effective width of the step is .30 - .05 nosing= .25 m.
··!
5. If there are 15 steps, multiply by the effective width of
the tread.
w =? _J~ E

.7 LO
Run = No. of steps - 1 x .25 (see figure 9-4)
I'!
N
Run = (15 - 1) x .25 = 3.50 m.
II
Q)

h=? .!!:! Note:

a:
•.·•. -::,!',
t The 3.50 meters is longer than the 2.75 m. distance
., ·of the run as specified in t.he problem, hence, adjustment
of the tread width is necessary.

..a,.----Run=2.75m. - - - - - - - a. From step 4 assume the t~ead width to be .25 m.

not .30 m.
FIGURE 9.4
b. Effective Wiqth = .25 minus .05 nosing
Solution EW = .20m.

1. Assume that the riser height is 18 cm. or .18 m. c. Trial multiplication:

\
2; Divide the height of the rise by .18 m. No. of steps X E.W = Run .
14 X .20 = 2.80 m.
2.65
14.72 say 15 steps
.18 This value is acceptable since the existing distance of the
run is 2.75 m.
246

247
 STAIRCASE
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

9-3 STRINGERS

Stringer is the inclined plane that supports or holds the

tread and the riser of a stair. The length of the stringer is deter-
mined by either the use of the Pythagorian Formula or by
actual measurement using a meter rule or tape. The steel square ,:, .
.
is very useful in stairway framing, know its functions and a sa- . ,,,.<f' \,
tisfactory result will be obtained.
,,,.
There are several forms of stringer classified according to
the methods of attaching the risers and the tread. Floorllne

Run= 3.50 m. _ _ _ _ _ ____...._

1. Cut type
2. Cleated type
3. Built-up FIGURE 9-6
4. Rabbeted (Housed)
Jllustration 9-3
Cut type stringers - are popularly employed in most mo-
dern and contemporary houses design. Determine the length of an open wood stringer required for
a stair with the following data:
Cleated type stringer - is used for a very rough work.
Run distance . = 3.50 m.
Height of the Rise = 2.50 m.
Built-up type stringer - is adopted on a wide stairs that re-
quires a center stringer.
Solution
Rabbeted type stringer - is adopted on a fine work and
1. Using the Formula:
usually made at the mill. The risers and treads are held in the
rabbets by wedges set in the glue.
Stringer length = .J-(Run) 2 + (Rise) 2
)
Stringer
SL = V (3.50) 2 + (2.50) 2
'---.. - -I. I'' p--,;~:.
SL = { 12.25 + 6.2·5
,'----_,,.:}:, ~ ~
SL = 1/ 18.50
CUT TYPE CLEATED BUILT-UP

SL = 4.30 m.
FIGURE 9-5

249
248
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
STAIRCASE

·• .
2. Convert to feet ·Stairs Angle of Inclination:
( 3 o m. = 14.33 ft . Ladder
. .30 -50° to'90°
Ramp 1 ° to 20°
3. Solving for the number of steps: Assume 18 cm. riser Stairs - 20 ° to __5_~
height. Ideal Stairs 30° to 35°
Divide:
Riser
= 2.50 = 13.88 say 14 steps
Riser .18
This problem ·could be solved by referring to Table TABLE 9-2 SPIRAL STAIRS
9-1. See the value of 4.31 m. along the 14 steps; 350 m. OPEN·RISER"TREADS
Tread O_egrees, CANTILEVER TREADS
length of run below the 30 cm. Tread and the 2.52 m. rise •No. of Tread Riser
ir.i Circle Head Roor
below the 18 cm. riser column. ir.i cm. i!lm.
22° - 30' 16
28° - O' 17.5 2.10
12- 13 18.0
30° - O' 12- 13 2.00
TABLE 9-1 :HEIGHT OF RISE, LENGTH OF STRINGER AND 20.0 2.00
RUN OF STAIRWAY
NO.OF LENGTH QF STRINGER LENGTH OF RUN HEIGHT OF RISE
STEPS TREAD AT TREAD AT RISER HT.AT
25 cm. 30cm. 25 cm. 30 cm. 17cm. 18cm.
lom. lam. in m. io m. in m. 111 m.

4
5
6
1.05
1.31
1.57
1.23
1.54
1.85
.80
LOO
1.20
1.00
1.25
1.50
.68
.85
1.02
.72
.90
1.08
• 30°

f 7 1.84 , 2.16 1.40 1.75 1.19 1.26

8 2.10 2.47 1.60 2.00 1.36 1.44
9 2.36 2.78 1.80 2.25 1.53 1.62 CANTILEVER TREADS ·
10 2.62 3.·o8 2.00 2.50 1.70 1.80
11 2.89 3.39 2.20 2.75 1.87 1.98
12 3.15 3.70 2.40 3.00 2.04 2.16 30° :;,~.

13 3.41 4.00 2.60 3.25 2.21 2.34 ~'.::_:-~

14 3.67 4.31 2.80 3.50 2.38 2.52

'--- 15 3.94 4.62 3.00 3.75 2.55 2:10
16
17
18
4.20
4.46
4.73
4.93
5.24
5.55
3.20
3.40
3.60
4.00
4.25
4.50
2.72
2.89
3.06
2.88
3.06
3.24
ii OPEN RISER TREADS
l~::Mil
i
i
I
19 5.00 5.85 3.80 4.75 3.23 3.42
20 5.62 6.16 4.00 5.00 3.40 3.60
II •

I
FIGURE 9-7

I 250
251
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

The Code specifies:

chapter Jf
1. The minimum width of any stair slab and the mini-
mum dimension of any landing should be about 1.10 m,

2. The maximum ·rise of a stair step.is usually speci-

fied as about 18 cm. A rise ·less tt,an 16 cm. is generally
not considered satisfactory.

3. The minimum tread width exclusive of the nosing

is 25 cm.
PAI.NTING
4. The maximum· height of a straight flight between
10-1 PAINT
landing is generally 3.60 m. except those serving as an exit
from place of assembly where a maximum height of 2.40
m. is normally specified. Paints are common.ly called "surface coating". It is define
as a coating applied to a surface or subtrate to decorate, to pre
5. The number of stairway is governed by the number tect, or to perform some other specialized functions.
~'
I
of probable occupants per floor, width of stairway and
f. The ingredients of paint are:
the building floor area. The distance from any point in an
I•
I
open floor area to the nearest stairway ~hall not exceed 30
1. Vehicle
meters and that the corresponding distance along corri-
,, 2. Solvents
dors in a particular area shall not exceed 38 meters.
3. Pigments
k 6. The combined width of all the stairway in any floor
4. Additives
~
shall accommodate at one time the total number of per-
~I sons occupying the largest floor area under the condition Vehicle - Is that substance in the paint which gives a filn
i'11
that one person for each .33 sq. m. floor area on the land- continuity and provides adhesion to the surface or subtrate. 1:
~►
11
ing and halls within the stairway enclosure. is called ve_hicle .because it carries the ingredients to the subtrat,
\
,,i which will remain on the surface after the paint had dried. Th:
~. '---- vehicle contains the film former which is the combination of
[1 7.In building of more than 12 meters height and in
r: all mercantile buildings regardless of height, the required
a. Resins
I• stairways must be completely enclosed by fireproof par-
b. Plasticisers
titions and at least one stairway shall continue to the.
c. Drying oil, etc.
roof.

252
253
 PAINTlNG
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

The vehicle is divided into: b) For the protective function - it contFibutes specifi1
properties such as hardnes~, resistance to corrosion, resis
1. Solid Thermoplastic film farmers - The solid resin is tance to rapid weathering, abrassion, and improved adhe
melted for app~ication and solidifies after application. sion:
c) It serves as. in ease of sanding, flame retardance and,
2. Lacquer type film formers - The vehicle dries by sol-
electrical conductivity.
vent evaporation.

3. Room temperature catalyzed film formers - Chemi- d) Pigments are also used to fill space. in paint films.
cal agents blended into the coating before application
cause cross-linking into a solid polymer at room tempera- Additives - are ingredients formulated .into the paint to
ture. modify the properties of e.ither the vehicle or the pigmentation' 1

or both. They give the wet paint, or dried paint film propertiesi
4. O.xidizing film formers - Oxygen from the air enters not present in the vehicle and pigmentation system. Additives,
the film and cross-links it to form a solid gel. improve a certain properties' of vehicle such as speed drying,
pigment resistance to fading or the entire paint such as the ease
5. Heat-cured film formers - Heat causes cross linking of application.
of the film former or activates a catalyst that is not active
A good quality pairit must have the following essential.and
until heat has been applied.
specific properties.
6. Emulsion-type film formers-- The solvent evapora-
1. Adhesion - coating must stick to the surface or subtrate
tion and the droplets of plastic film former floating in it
to bring other properties into work.
flows together to form a film.
,,.1 2. Ease of Application - paint must be easy to apply by
Solvents - are low viscosity volatile liquid used in coating the method presc;ribed by the manufacturer or of the user. Paint
to improve application properties. must go unto the subtrate in the specified film thickness, and
· dried in the .specified time to the desired appearance and possess
Pigment - paint pigments are sol.id grains or particles of the necessary specific properties.
uniform and controlled size that is generally i'nsoluble in the.ve-
AJcle of the coating. It contributes· to the following properties: 3. Film Integrity - the cu.red or dried film of paint must
have all the film properties as claimed by the ma,nufacturer.
a) For the decoration function, it contributes opacity, There should be no weak spots in the film caused by imperfect
color and gloss control. film· drying or curing.

255
254
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE PAINTING

4. Consistent Quality - paints must be consistent in quali- 2. Choice of the proper paint system. Apply the right
ty from can to can, batch by batch, shipment to shipment, co- paint on the right surface.
lor, viscosity, application properties and durability.
3. Good application with the right techn_ique and tools.
5. Specific properties should be considered for the parti-
cular use. For e·xample: a) Uniform wet and dry film thickness

a1 Kitchen enamel - must resist grease; heat and re-

b) Correct number of sequence of application see the
peated cleaning.
manufacturer's specifications.

b} Stucco or latex paint - must resist water, alkalai, sun-

c) The right tools and their· use,
light and permit passage of water vapor.

The proper application tools depends upon the flow pro-

c} Swimming pool paints - must have a specific calo-
perties of the paint being applied.
rine, wat~r and sunlight.

d) Exterior commercial aircraft finishes must resist '4. Correct drying cycle - The final properties of the dried
ultra violet degradation, erosion by air loss of adhesion at coating develops during the drying cycle. Unless conditions are
correct, corr~ct film properties will never develop.
high speed, rapid change of temperature, chemical attack
by the hydraulic fluids of the ·aircraft, and film rapture
. from the flexing of the fllm by the denting of the surface. 5. Protection against water - water is the hidden enemy of
paint. It is a pervasive element of deterioration and it causes:
10-2 PAINT FAILURE
a) Rusting and other corrosion
The primary cause of paint failure is "Moisture" which is b) Paint peeling
considered as a menace to the best of paint jobs. It is too frus- c} Masonry efflorescence an_d spaliing
trating to see your lovely new painted house deteriorating so d) Wood rot
soon specially if you have bought good paint, used good tools e) Corrosive water solution {staining sea water)
and spend a lot for it's labor.

The elements of a good painting job are:

10-3 SURFACE PREPARATION
1. Correct surface preparation: The primary essential
property of paint is Adhesion. Good adhesion demands pro• 1. Surface examination - No painting shall be done under
per surface preparation. · co.nditions which jeqpardize the quantity or appearance of the
painting or finishing.

256 257
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
PAINTING

Surface Preparation. The quickest way to achieve paint failure is impro- Cleaning Methods•
per surface preparation. It is just as important to.qualify a surface prepa-
ration contractor and applicator as it is to specify a painting system. The Sandblasting. There are three general methods of sand-
ability.
following_ subsections give a general overview of surface preparation con-
sideration.
General Specifications Conventional dry sandblasting. The sand is not recycled.
Surface examination. No exterior painting or interior fi- Dust respirators and other safety precautions are taken.
nishing shall be done under conditions which jeopardize For environmental restrictions on dry blast,ing are be-
coming increasingly severe.
the quality or appearance of painting or finishing.

Preparation. All surfaces shall be in proper condition to Vacuum sandblasting. This method reduces health ha-
receive the finish. Woodwork shall be hand-sandpapered zards and recovers the sand. it is more costly and less
and dusted clean. All knotholes, pitch pockets, or sappy efficient than dry blasting, but its efficiency can be in-
portions shall be shellacked or sealed with knot-sealer·. Nail creased by hoiding the vacuum cone at a slight distance
holes, cracks, or defects shall !>e carefully puttied after the from the surface. The vacuum method is useful inside
first coat with putty matching the color of the stain or shops and in areas where dust might damage machinery.
paint.
Wet sandblasting. )"his method reduce the dust hazard
Interior woodwork. Finishes shall be san~papered between and may be required by legal restrictions. The wet sarid ·
coats. Cracks, holes, or imperfections in plaster shall be and paint residues accumulate on ledges and other flat
filled with patching piaster and smoothed off to match areas, necessitating a rinsing operation.
adjoining surfaces.
Wire-brushing and scraping. Power and hand wire-brush-
Pl~ster or masonry. Plaster or masonry shall· be dry before ing are used mainly on small jobs, in cleaning small areas
any sealer or paint is applied. After the primer-sealer coat is after sandblasting, and on surfaces for which sandblast-
dry, all visible suction spots shall be toughed up before suc- ·ing is not feasible. Hand scraping is used on small areas,
ceeding coats are applied. Work is not to proceed until al! in places where access is difficult, and for final clean-up
such spots have been sealed. In the presence of high alkali after other methods have been employed.
conditions, surfaces should be washed to neutralize the
alkali. Power tools. Po_wer toois such as rotary wire and disc
tools, rotary impact chippers, and needle sealers may be
Metals. Metals shall be clean, dry, and free from mm scale used if sandblasting is not feasible.
and rust. Remove all grease and oil from surfaces. Wash
unprimed galvanized metal with meta! etching solution Water blasting. Water blasting is a clean and effective
and allow it to dry. method for the removal of old paint from masonry sur-
faces that is becoming more widely used. It is generally
"' Concrete and brick surfaces. These surfaces shall be wire-
brushed clean. Surfaces which are giazed or have. traces of
accept~ble for health and environmental requirements.
Water blasting is the most efficient method of cleaning
patching compound on them shall be sandblasted or acid· large masonry surfaces now in use, and it is often the
etched. preferred blast method for underwater or marine work.

258
259
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
PAINTING

Chemical methods
WATER BASE MASONRY PAINT

Acid-etching. An acid solution, with or without a 1. Acrylic Latex Exterior and Interior ½ lts./4 Its. 30 minutes : 30 to 4U
Paint masonry surface water Allow 6 hrs.: sq. m.
detergent, to roughen dense, glazed surfaces. It is
before coating
important to rinse thouroughly acid- etched s_urfaces
2. Acryli~ Semi- Exterior and Interi o.r water 30 minutes :
to remove the residual soluble reaction· products of 30 to 40
Gloss Latex masonry surface Allow 6 hrs.: sq. m.
calcium and magnesium chloride, which affect the before recoa-
ting
adhesion and stability of latex paints in particular.
3. Acrylic Gloss For exterior and inte- water 30 minutes 30 to 40
Paint removers. Both conventional solvent-based and Latex Pain_t rior masonry paint Allow 6 hrs.: sq. m.
before re-
water rinsable types maybe used to remove oid paint. coating
Most paint removers. contain some wax, which must 4. Acrylic Clear . : For application on water 1 hour Allow. 30 to 40
be removed completely before painting. Wax inhi- Gloss Emulsion: chalky surface to 6 hours be- : sq. m.
Paint improve adhesion of fore recoating
bits the drying of paints and destroys adhes:on. subsequent coats of
latex paint
Steam cleaning. Steam cleaning with or without de-
5. Latex H-Gloss For furniture, cabi- Use as is·
detergents is frequently ·used in. food-packing plants. 1 hour 30 to 40
Enamel nets, doors, win- Allow 4 hrs. sq. m.
A Mildewcide is usually added. Low-pressure steam d ows and Trim toys, before re-
tools wrought iron, coating
cleaners are available for use on walls in homes and primed metals and
offices .. appliances

Tinting Colors : Aery-colors

Alkali cleaning. Alkali cleaners should not be used on Water
masonry surfaces adjacent to aluminum, stainless steel 6. Acrylic Concrete Primer for old and Water 30 minutes : 30 to 40
or gal11anized metal. A thoroughly clean water rinse is I

essential, for residual alkali and detergents can cause Sealer :

4
new concrete, ex~ Allow 6 hrs. sq. m.
terior and interior before re-
greater damage if they are not removed completely, : surface coating
7. Masonry Sur-- : • Primer for old chalky Use as is 24 hours 25 to._30
face conditions: paint film Allow over- sq. m.
10-4 KINDS OF PAINTS, USES AND AREA COVERAGE night before :
recoating
ROOF PAINT
---
1. All weather For galvanized iron Water
Use Thinning Drying Area Coverage 4 hours 40 to 50 !
acrylic Roof sheet, asbestos Allow over-
Time per 4 liters Shield sq. m.
bricks concrete and night before :
stucco recoating
'PRIMERS
2. Portland Ce- G.I. sheet, concrete Paint Thin-
1. Interior Primer: For interior wood Paint Thin• 2 hours 25 to 30 6 hours 30 to 40
ment Paint CHB, stucco, brick ner : · Allow over-
and Sealer surfaces ner Allow over- sq. m. -sq. m .
or other zinc coated .night before:
night before : metal surfaces.
recoating reco,rtrng

2. Exterior w\od For exterior wood Paint Thin- 6 hours 30 to 40 3. Davies Roof Galvanized roofs and Paint Thin- 6 hours 30 to 40
Primer surfaces ner Allow over- sq. m. Paint other meta I such as ner Allow over- sq. m.
night before : aluminum and steel night before :
recoating recoating

260
261
 PAINTING
SIMPLIFIED C9NSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

VARNISHING
ENAMEL ANO GLOSS PAINT
For Dark wood that Use as is.
1. No. 48 Davies
Wood Bleach needs to be changed 1. Quick Drying For exterior and Paint Thin- 5 hours Allow: 30 to 40
I and 2 to light natural Enamel interior wood and ner 8 hrs. before: sq.m.
finish and making old metal surface recoating
wood color uniform
10 minutes : ·20 to 25 2. Interior Semi- For interior wood Paint Thin- 6 hours 25 to 30
For patching up Use as is sq;m. Gloss Enamel and metal surface ner Allow over- sq. m.
2. No. 77 Davies 30 minutes :
Lax-Tire Plas• ,urface defects on for dry hard: night before :
tic Wood wood surface as wood recoating
Dough knots, nail holes,
cracks and joints 3. FlatWall For.interior walls Paint Thin- 3 hours 40 to 50
12 minutis• 25 to 35 Enamel and ceilings ner Allow over- sq. m.
Sealer for open grain Paint Thin- night before :
3. Wood filler Allow·over- Sq,m.
of interior wood ner recoating
paste night before
recanting 4. Exterior Gloss For exterior wood Paint Thin- 6 hours 30 to 35
30 minutes : 30"1:o 40 Paint and pr.operly primed ner Allow 48 sq. m:
4. Non-Grain For wood surfaces sq.m. metal surfaces. hours before:
Raising wood Linseed Oil recoating
stain
Allow 24 30 to 40 Tinting Colors Oil Tinting Color
5. Oil Woodstain For panelling, cabi- i)ours before, sq. m.
nets, door jambs, AUTOMOTIVE FINISHING
recciatlng
floors, furnitures
and other woodworks 1. Lacquer For properly primed Lacquer Allow 30 40 to 50
35 to 40 Enamel metal and wood Thinner minutes be- sq. m.
Overnight fore recoa-
6. Finishing Oil To seal and finish sq.m.
interior wood surfaces : ting
such as furnitures wood
panelling etc. 2. Automotive . For exterior and inte• Lacquer 30 minutes 40 to 50
40to SO Lacquer rior wood or metal Thinner sq. m.
For floors, sidings, Paint Thin- 24 hours surface
7. Spar Varnish sq.m.
, decks of boats, etc. ner
40 to SO 3. Lacquer Primer · For.metal and wood Lacquer 30 minutes 40 to 50
Paint Thin- 24 hours Surface surface Thinner sq. m.
8. Daxpar Varnish For exterior and inte• sq.m.
rior wood surfaces ner
:also for nautical and 4. Lacquer Putty For exterior and in- Lacquer 10 minutes 20 to 30
aeronautical varnish terior metal and Thinner dry to S?nd sq.m.
requirements. wood surface in 1 hour
Lacquer 10 minutes 40to 45
9. Hi-Solid San- For interior new Allow 30 sq.m. 5. Pro-Lux Auto For automotive Paint Thin- 2 hours 30 to 40
wood such as furni- , Thinner sq .. m.
ding Sealer min. before Enamel finishing also for re- ner Dry hard in
ture and 'iixturefinishes recoating sidential and com- 10 hours
cabinets, doors, shelves mercial structure
, etc.
Lacquer Allow 3.0 30 to 40 6. Pro-Lux Ena- For exterior and Paint Thin- 2 hours 30 to 40
10. Hi-Solid clear For furnitures, cabi- minutes be- sq.m. mel Primer interior wood and ner Allow 8 sq.m.
nets, fixture', door pa- Thinner hours before :
Gloss Lacquer fore recoa- metal surfaces
nelling and trim tirig recoating

Lacquer Allow 30 30 to 40 7. · Davies Pro-Lux For exterior and inte· Use as is 2 hours 25 So 35
11. Hi-Solid Semi- For interior wood sq.m. Glazing Putty: rior metal and wood sq. m.
such as furnitures Thinner minutes
Gloss Lacquer before re-- surfaces
cabinets, doors
shelves panelling etc. coaUng
INDUSTRIAL PAINTS
Lacquer Allow 30 30 to 40
12. Hi-Solids Dead Interior wood, Furni• sq.m. l. Sliver Flnlsh ·For steel tanks, e>ete- : Use as is
Thinner minutes b•· 1 hour 40 to 50
Flat Lacquer ture, cabinets doors fore recoa- Aluminum rlor and anterior metal : · Allow24 sq.m.
,: jambs, panelling trim wood and masonry hours before:
ting
I: etc.· recoating
Lacquer Allow 30 30 to40
13. Water White For furnitures, wood
Thinner minutes be- sq.m.
Gloss Lacquer works, cabinets,
doors, panels and in• fore recoa-
terior walls ting 263

262
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
PAINTINq

2. Heat Resis-
ting
For interior and ex-
terior surfaces such as
Use as is I hour
Allow 24
40 to 50
sq. m.
l
radiators, boilers, pipes hours before:
stocks and general in• recoating 13. Epoxy
dustrial equipment For steel, aluminum, Epoxy Re- 6 hours
Enamel galvanized iron, wood 30 to 40
ducer Allowover- : sq; m.
Usa as is 1 hour at ·40 to 50 and concrete
3. Hi-Heat Re- For superheated night before :
sisting Paint steam lines, boiler ca,' : temp of sq. m. recoating
sings, boiler drum and 450 F max. 14. Epoxy Gia-
rockets launchers 1200 F Body repair on air- Epoxy Re-
zing Putty craft, automotive, 2 hours
ducer
4. Asphalt Base For asbestos cement Use as is I ·hour 20 to 30 equipments
Aluminum composition and Allow 24 sq.m.
hours 15. Epoxy Glue
metal Multipurpose thermo Use as is
before re• setting plastic mate- 8 hours 30 to 40
coating Full sq. m.
rials for cementing or
bonding rigid mate- strength in
5. Traffic Paint For asphalt and ma- Use as is 1 hour Allow: 20 to 30 rials 96 hours
sonry surfaces low 24 hrs. sq. m.
before re- 16. Pure Pale
coating Use as thinner for Use as is
Boiled Linseed exterior house paint
Oil
6. Blackboard For wood or metal Paint thin- 2 hours 35 to 40
Slating surfaces ner Allow over- sq. m. 17. Concrete Neu :
night before : Treatment to neutra- Use as is
tralizer lize masonry surfaces 24 hours 30 to 40
eecoating sq. m.
1_8. Rust Con-
7. Davies-Anti For hulls and below Paint thin- 12 hours 30 to 40 f'.or inhibiting corro- Use as is
verier s1on overnight. 25 to 35
Corrosive Ma- water line of ships ner Allow over• sq. m.
rine Paint night be- sq. m.
19. Paint Re- Paint Stripper
fore recoa- Use as is overnight
ting mover 25 to 35
sq. m.
20. Mildewcide Destroy molds and
8. Marine Bott For properly primed Paint thin- 12 hours 30 to 40 Water
Solution mildews on new and
topping Paint surfaces between the ner Allow 24 sq. m.
light and deep load hours before: previously painted
lines of s~ips recoating surfaces

9. Anti-Fouling
Paint
For properly primed
surfaces beloW'-the . Paint thin-
ner
8 hours
Allow 12
30 to 40
sq. m.
water line of ships hours before: PRIMERS
recoating 1. Preparakote Primer'for ferrous Paint Thin-
Red Oxide and non ferrous me- 3 hours 35 to 45
10. Hull, Deck, For use above the Paint thin- 12 hours 30 to 40 Primer ner
Mast and Top- tals sq. m.
water line of ocean ner Allow 24 sq. m.
side Paint going vessels, equip- hours bef_ore: 2. Zinc Chromate:
For exterior··and inte-
ment and structures recoating Primer Paint Thin- 3 hours
rior metal surfaces ner 30 to 40
near the sea sq.m.
exposed to normal .
11. Machinery For marine engine Paint: thin- l hour 30 to 40 industrial environment;
Engine machineries and ner Allow24 sq. m. 3. Red Lead
Enamel equipment casi.ngs hrs. before Rust preventive primer: Paint Thin-
Primer for ferrous surfaces : 3 hours 30 to 40
recoating ner
sq. m.
12. Epoxy Primer For steel, aluminum Epoxy Re- 6 hours 30 to ~o
galvanized iron ducer Allow over- sq. m. SOURCE: DA VIES PAINT ManlJ(J/ of information
night b~fore :
\ recoating

264

- 265
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
PAINTING

The area coverage of paint per 4 liters can as specified by

the manufacturer depends upon the porosity of the surface. 1. The kind of tools used in the painting work such as brush,
Surface porosity could be classified into three categories: roller or spray has its own performance and efficiency rela-
tive to the spreading of paint on various surface condition.
1. Fine surface Definitely, the spreading capability of the tools will not be
the same.
2. Semi Rough surface
3. Rough surface
2. Any of the tools used for painting application has its factor
Generally, the average area coverage per can of 4 iiter.spaint of waste for washing and cleaning including the remains in
ranges from 30 to 40 square meters depending upon the condi- the can or container. When calsomine powder is used for
tion of the surface to receive paint. Under such condition the putty as a common practice paint is the main base for mix-
first thing to be considered by the estimator is to examine the ing which· simply mean reduction ·in the area
covering.
surface to be painted. is it concrete, wood, metal etc.
In order to be safe in the estimate of the paint require-
1

Verify this condition of the surface and know under what ments, adopt the manufactur~rs' specifications and their, esti-
category does it fali, only then is the time to select the right mate as to the area coverage per 4 liters can with a reservation
of 10% all0wance factor.
kind of paint for the right surface. ·

There are instances wherein due to financial constraint, the

owner requires his painter to expand the coverage of the paint Illustration 10-1
contrary to the label specifications and the effects a.re:
A concrete fire wall of a building measures 30 meters long
1. Over thinning reduces the viscosity of the paint and 12 meters ~igh. Find the number of 4 liters can latex paint,
required if the wall is:
,~. . J
2. The required film of dried paint could not be attained
1. Wooden Travelled finish (Rough Surface) ,,
3. The quality and durability of the paint is sacrificed. 2. Paper finished (semi-rough surface)

Solution:
10-5 ESTIMATING YOUR PAINT

While we agree on the manufacturers' estimate of area cove- A. Wooden Trovelled Finished
ring per 4 liters can of their paint, the promotional aspect of
their products could not be discounted. Likewise, the company 1. Solve for the wall area
estimate might have overlooked the following factors that
affects the area covering of paint. A =30.xl2m.
A = 360sq. m.

266
267
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
PAINTING

2. Solve for the concrete neutralizer 3. Add 10% allowance = 2.0

360 = 12 qallons water Total = 22.56 cans@ 4 liters

30
Order: 23 cans@ 4 liters
Where 30 sq. m.-area coverage per gallon of water.
1llustration 1 0-2
If one pint of neutralizer is mixed to 2½ gallons of
water. A 10 class room two storey building has a T & G lumber
flooring resting on a 50 mm .x 200 mm (2" x 8") dressed
Divide: floor joist without a ceiling. Tlie president of the school re-
1 quires the bill of materials for the painting of the joists and the
_~ = 4.8 say 5 pints concrete neutralizer T & G underflooring.
2

3. Solve fo~ acrylic latex paint@ 30 sq. m./4 liters

360 sq. m.
= 12 cans
30 sq. m.

For Second Coat x 2

7.00

24 cari @ 4 liters
Add 10% 2.4
Order 26.4 say 27 cans @ 4 Its.

B. Paper-Finished Wall

1. Area = 360 sq. m. @ i·t

35 sq. r'n.
= 10 .28 cans 4 I ers
TT
:i·
~

Where: 35 sq. m. = area coverage per 4 liters ,·~

t ' ~ ·
m. .20
@a Ri ·HR Mai
+-+ . SECTION X -X
2. Second Coat multiply by 2 .05 -+--f
.05

10.28 X 2 = 20.56
FIGURE 10-1
268
269
 ----i

PAINTING
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

Solution Therefore:
1. After inspection, the recommendation is to use flat wall
80 cans x ½ Its.Jean = 40 Its.
enamel paint.
Add 10% = 4 liters
2. Solve for the area of one classroom feiling
Order: 44 liters 4 cans @ 4 Its.
a) Area of the T & G surface
23 strips x .25 m. x 9.00 m. = 51.76 sq. m.
Comments:
b) Area of the floor joist
surfaces = .45 m. 93.15 sq. m. 1. The a11owance order for paint thinner is necessary ~-
23 pcs. x .45 x 9.00 m. = 144.91 sq. m. cause this is the most abused material in almost all
painting jobs. Likewise, lacquer thinner allowance
say 145 sq. m. per classroom should be increased up to 15% for thinning9f lacquer
paints, multiple rubbing in varnishing job and clean-
3. Multiply by 10 rooms: ing of tools including its rapid evaporation.
145 sq. m. x 10 = 1,450 sq. m.
2. In estimating paints for walls, subt_ract the window
4. Divide by the area coverage of Flat wall enamel paint
opening if its area is more than 5% of the wall area.
1 •.:~o = 36.25 cans@ 4 liters .
On the otherhand, door openings are usually not sub-
tracted in the computation of the wall area.

3. In ordering paint for your house or any structure, we

5. For Second Coat: don't just order paint, v,e have to specify· what kind
of paint as there are so many kinds of paint with spe-
36.25 2 = 72.5
X cific purpose and warranty_if properly applied on the
Add 10% = 7.25 right medium of surfac(;!S. (See Table 10-1)
79.75 say 80
4. For best result of your painting job always specify
6. Solve for the paint thinner
good quality premium paint. The durability and ap-
pearance of good paint will compensate the initia_l
The manufacturer specify½ Its. per 4 liters of paint
cost and those who have tried it did never regret.

271
270
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE PAINTING

10-6 PAINT FAILURE AND REMEDY Remedy: Removed the paint, clean the surface apply
good primer then final coat.
Types of paint failure
5. Checking and Flaking - caused by expansion or contrac-
1. l,31istering or Peeling·_ occurs when the moisture trapped tion of wood.
in the siding evaporates from the wood when exposed to
sun pushes the paint out the surface. Remedy: See Blistering.

Remedy: l. Find and eliminate the sources of moisture.

· 6. Peeling or Cracking of Paint on Galvanized Sheet - Indi-
2. Scrap off old paint around the· blistered
cates the use of improper rnetal primer or no primer at
area, let dry, apply good primer then final
all. The paint film has no adhesion.
paint of good quality.

Remedy: Strip off all loose paint clean with solvent dry
2. Chalking - means that your paint was too thin without
then apply galvanized paint.
the required pa.int film.

7. · Fading - is normal but if fading isfast and excessive that

Remedy: Be more generous to your paint, spend a little
means you used poor kind of paint.
for two coatings.

3 .. Flaking - the result of inadequate or poor surface prepa-· Remedy: Repain~. Be sure to buy the best brand of
ration. The paint flakes off in "scales" or paint for it contains more and better pigment.
powders" or · powders and chalk off. than the cheaper one.

Remedy: Removed the paint on affected area by wire 8. Bleeding - It is caused by inadequate sealing at the first
brush. Seal all cracks against moisture, by con- paint application.
crete neutralizer then apply final coat of latex Remedy: Scrape off the wood surfaces then repaint.
paint.
9. Mildew - thrives on a high humidity and temperature.
4. Cracking and Alligatoring - Means that paint was applied The fungus are stimulated and grows on the paint film.
in several heavy coats not observing the sufficent drying If covered by new paint, just the same it will grow
time between coats. The· owner or the contractor might through the new coat of paint.
have been so in a hurry to finish the job. Another cause
is when the undercoat was not compatible with the fi- Remedy: Wash the surface with midwash solution di-
.n ish coat. Example: for ignorance, using a quick buying luted with water. Scrub the surface. Rinse
enamel as final coat over a flat wall paint. with clean water, allow 48 hours to dry then
apply final paint.

272
273
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION_ ESTIMATE
AUXILIARY TOPICS

10. Staining - caused' by wood preservatives of rust of nails. Vinyl wallpaper has three kinds, they are:

Remedy: Remove paint on affected area. Remove rust 1. Vinyl laminated to paper
on nails apply lead prii:ner to metal and wood 2. Vinyl laminated to cloth
primer then final coc1t with quality house 3. · Vinyl impregnated cloth on paper backing, which is ex-
paint. tremely durable, easy to clean and resistance to da-
mage.·

10-7 WALL PAPERING Caution in buying vinyl wallpaper:

The term "wallpaper" refers not only to paper substances Examine the label if it is vinyl coated only. These are
that are pasted on walls and ceiling but also includes vinyl, cork, not wear resistant, grease resistant, or washable. Never con-
fabrics, grass cloth, foils and many other surface covering ma- fuse them with vinyl wallpaper.
terials which are available in the market.
In hanging your vinyl wallpaper always use and specify
In estimating your wall paper always provide extra rolls in vinyl mildew resistant adhesive only.
anticipation of the following:
Vinyl wallpaper stretches if pulled, hairline cracks will
1. Replacement of ruined er damaged material_in handling appear at seams as wallpaper shrinks when it dries, hence,
or working.
avo.id stretching your vin~I wallpaper.

2. Additional area which are not included in the or-iginal

plan. Foils is another wallpaper simulated metallic finish or alu-
minum laminated to paper. Do not fold or wrinkle the foil,
'there is no remedy to creases. Smooth .Sl!rface is required to
3. For future repair which might be so necessary that
avoid reflective surfaces as foil magnify any imperfections on
needs the original batch for color and design matching.
the surface to ·which it is attached. Use mildew-resistant vinyl
adhesive only.
4. The size of the wall paper to cover the surface depends
not only on t_he area of the surface but also on the wall Grass cloth, Hemp, Burlap, Cork are mo_unted on a paper
paper pattern. backing which could be weakend from oversoaking with paste.
Paste one strip at a time.
5. Trim can be used as a decorative boarder and it is sold
by the yard or meter. · Fl~cks is made of_ nylon or rayon available on paper, vinyl
or foil wallpapers. Use paint roller_ or squeegee for best result.

274
275
L-
 11
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION. ESTIMATE

chapter

TABLE 10-1 WALL PAPER TECHNICAL DATA

. '
WIDTH LENGTH/ROLL EFFECTIVE ADHESIVE
COVERING/ROLL BOX per ROLL

.52m. 10.05 m. 5.22 sq. m. .17

. 54m 1().05 m.
.71 m. 13.70 m.
5.42 sq. m.
9.72 sq. m.
.18
.32 A'UXI LI ARY T01PlCS
Estimating procedure: 11-1 ACCORDION DOOR COVER

1. Determine the area of the surface to receive wall paper. The following are the materials required for every meter run
of an accordion door cover 2.40 mts. high. ·
2. · Subtract the area opening such as doors, windows, etc_.
12 pcs. .15 x 2.40 m. G. I. Blade
3. Divide the net wall area by the effective covering of the 15 pcs. 6 mm~ x 2.40 m. Pin
wallpaper size as selected from Table 10-1 to get the num- 14 pcs. 5 mm x 25 mm x 2.40 m. Flat Bars
ber of roll. 24 pcs. 3 mm x 12 mm x .60 m. Flat Bars
35 pcs. 6 mm p x 38 mm Rivets
4. Add 5 to 10% allowance depending upon the design pat- 21 pcs. 6 mm ¢ Hole x 19 .mm Washers
tern. 52 pcs. 6 mm¢ x 16 mm Rivets
2 pcs. 38 mm J:1 Bearing with Rivert & Bushing
5. Multiply-the number of rolls by the corresponding value 2 pcs. 9 mm x 32 mm x 2.00 m. Flat Bars
of adhesive, the result is the number of box as required.
To find the required material for a given door opening,
multiply each item by the span of the door opening in meters.

Illustration 11-1

A 4.00 m. wide doors. requires an. accordion cover for se-

curity purposes. The accordion door is to be opened at the
center foi'ded at both sides direction. List down the mate-
rials.

277
276
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE AUXI llARY lOPICS

1.00 m.
11-2 PILES
Guide Rail

Piles shall be peeled removing all the rough bark at least

80% of the inner bark. Not less than 80% of the surface on
any circumference shall be clean wood. No string of inner
bark remaining on pile shall be over 2 cm. wide and 20 cm.
long. All knots shall be trimmed closed to the body of the
· / ~ pile.
PLAN
TABLE 11 -1 WOOD PILES

DIAMETER-IN. FROM BUTT I MtN: TIP

LENGTH OF PILE Mi!l.Cm. Max.Cm. I Diam.Cm.

FIGURI; 11-1 Under 12 meters 30 45 20

12m.to18m. 32 45 18
Solution Over 18 meters 35 50 15

Span of door =4 meters

The diameter of piles shall be• measured in their peeled
Mul_tiply: condition. When the pile is not exact!Y round, the average
of 3 measurements may be used. The butt diameter for the
4.00 X 12 = 48 pcs .. 15 x 2.40 m. G.I. Blade same length of pile shall be as uniform as possible. All piles shall
retain preservative of at least the amount given in the following
4.00 X 15 = 60 pcs. 6 mm 9.1 x 2.40 m. Pin
table:
4.00 X 14 = 56 pcs. 5 mm x 25 mm x 2.40 m.
Flat Bars
~.00 X 24 = 96 pcs. _3 mm x 12 mm x .60 m. TABLE 11-2 MINIMUM PRESERVATION PER CUBIC
Flat Bars METER OF WOOD
4.00 X 35 = 140 pcs. 6 mm ~ x 38 mm Rivets
TYPE OF PROCESSING
4.00, X
4.00 X
21 = 84 pcs. 6 mm <j, Hole x 19 mm Washers ·
52 = 208 pcs. 6 mm <j, 16 mm Rivets
USE AND TYPE I EMPTY CELL PROCESS FULL CELL PROCESS

4.00 X 2 = 8 pcs. 38 mm <jJ Bearing with Rivets

& Bushing General Use 193 kg: 321 kg.
4.00 X 2 = 8 pcs. 9 mm x 3 mm x 2.00 m. Marine Use 193 kg. 321 kg.
Flat Bars

278 279
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE AUXILIARY TOPICS

... Lumber shall be treated by pressure method with creosoted

11-3 BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT
coal solution or creosote petroleum solution.
Hot Asphalt Type - Approx.½ or 1.25 cm. thick.
TABLE 1 i-3 RANGE OF SKIN FRICTION FOR VARIOUS
SOIL TABLE 11-5 BITUMINOUS MACADAM WEARING COURSE

VALUE IN-KG ./SQ. M. BITUMINOUS AGGREGATE

MINIMUM MAXIMUM MATERIALS COARSE KEY
L-.Sq.M. Kilos Per Sq. M
1. Silt and Soft Mud 244 489
2. Silt, compacted 587 1,712 First Spreading 90
3. Clay. and Sand 1,956 3,913 First Application 4.0
4. Sand with some clay 2,446 4,891 Second Spreading 13
5. Sand and Gravel 2,935 8,804 Second Application 1.8
Third Spreading I 11
Third Application 1.4
TABLE 11-4 ALLOWANCE BEARING POWER OF Fourth Spreading I 8
DIFFERENT SOILS TOTAL I 7.2 122
VALUE IN SHORT TON/SQ. M.
KIND OF 501.L Min. Max. Usual
TABLE 11-6 BITUMINOUS MACADAM PAVEMENT
1. Quick Sand and Alluvial
soil 5.38 10.76 5.38 (Hot Asphalt Type Approx. 2¼ or 5.7 cm. Thick)
2. Clay (Soft) 8.07 32.28 21.50
3. Wet Clay and soft sand 10.76 21.50 16.14 BITUMINOUS AGGREGATE
·4. Clay and Sand in alternate MATERIALS COARSE CHOKER KEY
layers 10.76 43.04 21.50 L. Sq. M .. KILOS l per Sq. M.'
5. Firm and Dry loam or
clay, hard dry clay First Spreading 90
or fine sand 21.50 43.04 32.28 $econd Spreading I 10
6. Sand,confined 10.76 43.04 32.28 First Application 5.5
7. Comp.act Coarse Sand or Third Spreading I 10
Stiff Gravel 32.28 64.56 43.04 Second Application 3.5
8. Sand and Gravel Well f"ourth Spreading I 8
Cemented 53.80 107.60 86.08 Thrrd Application 2.0
9. Good Hard Pan or Hard Fifth Spreading I 8 -
Shale 53.80 107.60 86.08
10. Rock 53.80 269.00 161.40 TOT~L 11.0 126

280 281
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE AUXILIARY TOPICS

Open Graded Plan Mix Surface Course 11-4 HOUSEOFWATERTANK

The approximate amount of materials per square meter If the height of a building requires water pressure in excess
of the open graded plant mix surfacing course and the sequence of that in the city main, house tank is necessary. To provide suf-
of placing shall be as follows: ficient pressure, the bottom of the tank must be el~vated 20 ft.
above the highest fixture.
Plant - mixed aggregate - 80 kilos
Choker aggregate 3 kilos Tanks may be constructed of either wood, steel or con-
Bituminous Materials - .45 liters crete. The required capacity of a tank varies with the capacity
Choker aggregate 3 to 5 kilos and running time of the house or fill pump.

The weight above are those of aggregate having a bulk spe-

cified gravity of 2.65. TABLE 11-8 WATER CONSUMPTION IN OFFICE BUILDING

BUILDING TYPE CONSUMPTION

·TABLE ·11-7 BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT GALJHOUR/PERSON

(Hot Asphalt Type-Approx. 5/8" or 1.6 cm. Thick) Commercial, no airconditioning 3.8
Commercial, with airconditioning 7.3 - 9.2
Sequence of Placing Operations and Owner occupied with kitchen and
Approx. Amount of Materials per Sq. M. laundry, no airconditioning 7.3
Other occupied with kitchen,
OPERATIONS BITUMINOUS
MATERIALS
I AGGREGATE
COARSE CHOKER
laundry and with airconditioning 9.0

L per Sq. M. KILOS Per Sq. M.

First Application 1..0 Example:

_Spreading 22
Second Application 1.3 A commercial office building has an occupancy of 800 per-
Spreading 6.5 sons.
Third Application 0.7
Spreading 4.5 800 X 3.8 = 3,040 gallons per hour
TOTAL 3.0 33 Tanks should have: 1,520 gal. per½ hour supply
- Pump should have: 3,040 gal. per hour; or
* Value given with bulk specific gravity of 2.65. 506.6 gal. per minute,

282 283
 AUXILIARY TOPICS
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

TABLE 11-10 HOTW~TERCONSUMPTION IN

TABLE 11-9 COLD WATER CONSUMPTION APARTMENT BUILDING

TYPE OF BUILDING GALLONS/PERSON/DAY PUBLIC HOUSING APT.HOTEL

GALLON ·GALLONS
Residence. Average 50
Residence Large 100 Average Daily:
Apartment Low-rent 75 per. Apartment 79 50
Apartment High-rent 100 per Person 28 41
Hotels: 100 per Room 22 36
Office Building 25
Maximum Daily:
per Apartment 92 69
Assume that a commercial office building water consump- per Person 33 48
tion i~ 3,040 gallons. Find the size o.f the proposed water tank per Room 26 43
or the volume in cubic meters to contain 3,040 gallons.
Maximum Hourly:
per Apartment s:9 7.6
1 cu. m. = 264.2 gallons: per Person 3.2 5.3
per Room• 2.5 4.9
3,040 gal. 11.5 cu. m. or 12 cu. m.
264.2

Note: This volume is inside dimension ofthe tank. Note: Allow .4 gal per hour per person of hot water in
office building and 1.0 per hour per meal.
Hot Water

1. Determine the daily consumption of cold water, mul- 11-5 FILLING MATERIALS
tiply the building occupants by the number of gallons as listed
in Table 11-10. Estimating Procedure

2. Hot Water: Divide the result of 1 by No. 3 1. Compute for the volume to be filled up

3. Probable hourly demand for hot water, divide the daily 1 x w x h

total consumption from 2 by 10.
2. Determine the kind of filling materials as shown on
4 .. Average hourly demand for hot water, divide the daily Table ll~ll.
consumption .of hot water in 2 by 24.

285.
2.84
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE AUXILIARY TOPICS

3. Multiply the result found in step one by the correspon-

ding percentage of additional volume Table 11-11. Solution:

4. Add this result to that in Step 1 to obtain the com- 1. Find the volume of A
pact volume desired.
15.00 X 20.00 X .50 = 150 CU. m.
TABLE 11-11 FILLING MATERIALS
· 2. Find the volume of B
MATERIALS PERCENTAGE ADDITIONAL TO
(LOOSE VOLUME) OBTAIN COMPACT VOLUME
15.00 x 20.Q_0 x .65 = 195 cu. m.
Earthfill 23%
Earth and Sand 18% Total volume = 345 cu. m.
Selected Borrow 15%
3. From Table 11-11 + 23%
Example:
345 X 23% = 79.35
A subdivision lot as shown in Figure 11-2 requires
filling. Compute the earthfill materials required. Volume required = · 424.35 cu. m.

11-~ ~LASS JALOUSIE

TABLE 11-12 GLASS JALOUSIE STANDARD HEIGHT

No. of Ht. of Square Foot No. of Ht. of
Per Blade Blades Glass
~20.oom. J r20.00m.~
Blades
4
Glass
14 7/8" 4 X 22 = 0.61 13 45 3/8"
5 18 3/8" 4 X 24 = 0.67 14 49 7/8"
X -t...

~
>.P . .

If}½+. .
. .. .t ~

;v·· .. -·~--,
OOm.&u:-B;e:::
. , ,&t
6
7
8
9
21 7/8"
·25 3"/8"
28 7/8"
32 3/8"
4 X 26 = 0.72
4 X 28 = 0.78
4 X 30 = 0.83
4 X 32 = 0.89
15
16
17
18
53 3/8"
56 7/8"
60 3/8"
63 7/8"
SECTION X-X 10 35 7/8" 4 X -34 = 0.94 19 . 67 3/8"
a:
11 39 3/8" 4 X 36 = l;OQ 20 70 7/8"
PLAN
12 42 7/8" 4·x 38 = 1.06 21 74 3/8" '
4x40=1.11 22 77 7/8"
4x42=1.17
4 X 44 = 1:22
4 X 46 = 1.28
4 X 48 = 1.33
FIGUR~ 11-.2
. 286
28
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE 'AUXILIARY TOPICS,

11-7 NIPA SHINGLE ROOFING Reminder:

Slope area should be considered in solving for the number

of pieces required and that the slope of the rafters should not
_ ( ' BAMsoo SPLf1

-~~<--<..f;.~2-
......,..'l~;,::,-,,,,,.~~ -225 o,
be less than 30 degrees for roof durability.

Illustration 11-2

~~?41~
Ni PA SHINGLES~""
The area of the roof frami'ng is 30 sq. m. having a general
dimension of 3.00 by 10.00 meters. Find the number of nipa
shingle required adopting 3 inches end lapping tied on the
bamboo split ribs at every other intervals using Class "A" nipa
FIGURE 11-3
shingle.
Nipa shingle is a native local product commonly used as
_roofing materials in our country prior to the introduction of Solution:
G.I. sheet and other roofing materials. The nipa palm usually
l. Determine the area of the roof framing.
grows on swampy areas and th is are the source of the raw mate-
2. Multiply the area by the number on Table 11-13 cor-
rials for making nipa shingles. One nipa stalk contains approxi-
responding the data as specified in the problem.
mately 174 to 180 nipa leaves. The nipa shingle is classified into
3. Convert the result in bundles.
two, they are Class "A" having a length of 56 inches and Class
4. Solve for the required rattan and bamboo split by the
"B" measuring 48 inches long, the former contains approxi-
aid of Table 11-13
mately 82 nipa leaves while the latter has approximately 68
pieces.
30 x 10.27 = 308 pcs.
TABLE 11-13 NIPA SHINGLE TECHNICAL DATA
308
E11d Effective coverage Pieces Ratta11 pcs. 12.3 say 13 bundles
lap in sq. mts. per sq. m. per sq. m. 25
in Class A Class B A B * **
Rattan Split:
4" .1300 .·1·090 7.70 - 9.18 1.8 3.6 30 x 2 pcs./sq. m. = 60 pcs.
3" .0975. .0818 10.27 12.23 2.0 4.0
2" .0650 .0545 15.38 18.31 2.8 5.6 Bamboo Split
1" .0325 .0273 30.77 36.62 4.0 8.0
Bamboo poles are also classified into three. They are: Class
* Rattan ties for every other bamboo.split ribs. "A", Class "B" and Class "C", which are then divided into
*:\" Rattan ties for every bamboo split ribs. splits approximately P//' to 2" nailed on the purlins at an in- .

288 289
1
 AUXILIARY TOPICS
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

tervals of 25 cm. apart. Care should be taken into consideration

in nailing the bamboo splits to avoid cracks or separation -6f TABLl:: 11-15 TECHNICAL DATA
the grains for it will affect its strength. Fresh or dried bamboo No./Sq.M. No. of 1 O' Rattai:1/Sq. M.
E11d Lappi11g
is brittle that nailing will cause damage to most of the splits.
3" 84 7 pcs.
The fresh bamboo should be sundried for a day then nailing Gpcs.
4" 60
should be done immediately the following day to avoid cracks 5 pcs.
5" 50
or separation of the grains.
Note:
TABLE 11-14 BAMBOO POLES DIVIDED INTO SPLIT
Add 10 pcs. Anahaw leaves for every linear meter for
OF 45 mm to 60 mm ( 1 ¼" to 2")
gutter and 20 pcs. for ridge and hip line. Add 10% al-
CLASS NO.OF SPLIT APPROX. Ll;NGTH COVERAGE lowance for damaged anahaw leaf.
in meters i!l sq. meters

A 8 9'.00 12 1llustration 11-3

8 6 7.50 9
C 4 6.00 4 From Figure 11-5, find the number of anahaw leaves and
rattan splits required.
Solving the above problem using Class "B" poles

3~.m. = 3.3 say 4 pcs.

9
or: ~-
~ C ) C ) A ~-
30 sq. m. . '· C)C) ~
= 2.5 say 3 pcs. Class A
12 ,. '!,· /'

11-8 ANAHAW ROOFING '

I!
'1'
I ANAHAW LEAVES
">

BAMBOO SPLIT

FIGURE 11-4 FIGURE.11-5

291
290
.1
 SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
jAUX!L!ARY TOPICS

l'
Solution I
I, 10-9 CONSTRUCTION TERMS
Area A = 30 sq. m.
= I ENGLISH - PILIPINO EQUIVALENTS
Area B 30 sq. m. = 60 sq. m.
1. POST halige, poste
Adopting 4" end lapping: 2. GIRDER guililan
3. JOIST suleras
60 X 84 = 5,040 pcs.
4. FLOORING
I, sahig, suelo
5. GIRT sepo
Ridge line: I'
10 m. X 20 = 200 pcs. 6. BEAM biga
7. BOTTOM CHORD barakilan
Gutter line: 8. TRUSS kilo
10 X 10 = 100 pcs. 9. TOP CHORD tahilan '
10. PURLIN reostra
Total = 5,340 pcs. .
I
I
I
Rattan: 11. FASCIA BOARD senepa
12. CEILING JOIST , kostilyahe
60 X 6 = 360 pcs. 13. ·SIDING {external) tabike
I 14. STUD (vertical) pilarete
!I 15. STUD {horizontal) pabalagbag
.,,
i
I 16. WINDOW SILL pasamano
I
17. WINDOW HEAD sumbrero
i.
I, 18,. WINDOW or DOOR JAMB · hamba
. 19. COLLAR PLATE sinturon
, 20: STRINGER (open) hardinera

21. STRINGER {closed madre {de escalera)

22. TREAD,
,, 23., RISER
baytang
takip {silipan)
24. HANDRAIL gabay
I 25. MOULDING muldura

26.· EAVE sibe

27. PROJECTION bolada
28. FRAMEWORK balangkas
29. GUTTER kanal
30. CONDUCTOR alulod
292
293
 AUXILIARY TOPICS

SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE

31. W.I. STRAP planchuela MENSURATION FORMULAS

32. BOLT pierrio
33. SCAFFOLDING plancha == ½ base x altitude
34. STAKE estaka Area = base x altitude
Triangle - Area
35. PLl;\STERED COURSE kusturada Parallelogram - - = 1/z sum of parar\el side
· Trapezoid Area times altitude
2·
36. STUCCO or PLASTER palitada == 0.7854 x diameter2
37. SCRATCH COAT rebocada - - - Area == 3:1416 x radius
Circle
38. PICKWORK (on masonry) piketa = 3.1416 x diameter
39. VARNISH FINISH monyeka Circumference = 6.2832 x radius
40. SPACING or GAP biento
== 0.7854 x short diameter
Ellipse - - - - Area tirnes long diameter
41. CONCRETE SLAB (rough) larga masa
42. ALIGNMENT asintada 1/z slant height x circum-
43. PLUMB LINE hulog - - - Surface =
44. CEMENT TILE baldosa Cone ference of base
(curved only) 1/3 area of base x ht.
45. CEMENT BRICK ladrilyo Volume ==
length x circumference
46. DOOR FILLET batidora Cylinder - · - ~ - Surface == plus area of ends
47. GROOVE kanal 0.7854 x length x (dia.)2
Volume ==
48. GOOD GRAIN haspe
49. PATTERNorSCHEDULE plantilya Surface == 3.1416 x (diameter) 2
50. HINGE bisagra Sphere == Circumference x diameier
3
Volume = 0,5236 x (diameter)
== 1/6 circumference x (dia.)2
51. P~NELLED DOOR de bandeha == 2/3 volume of circum-
52. EARTHFILL escombro
scribing cylinder
53. MASON RY Fl LL lastilyas
54. ADOBE ANCHOR liyabe
55.' SOLDER hinang

56. N ICOLITE BAR estanyo

57. TEMPER (metal work) suban, subuhan
58. DIAGONAL BRACE pie de gallo
59. NAIL SETTER punsol
60. WI RING KNOB
61. CABINET HINGE
poleya
espolon
Il 295'
I.
294
 lJJ

l
0)-
-· r:y
L..1)
r--
vei
-
~
()a